1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
161 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
163 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
164 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
175 by the \SpecialChar LyX
180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
182 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
183 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
184 Documentation mailing list:
185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
187 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Note Note
210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
211 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
212 \begin_inset Newline newline
217 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
225 \begin_layout Standard
226 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
227 LatexCommand tableofcontents
234 \begin_layout Chapter
238 \begin_layout Section
239 What is \SpecialChar LyX
243 \begin_layout Standard
245 is a document preparation system.
246 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
247 scripts, publishable books, business
248 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
249 It is unlike most other
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
259 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
275 pt type, left justified, 5
276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
289 \begin_layout Standard
290 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
295 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
299 \begin_layout Standard
304 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
305 's philosophy: most importantly,
306 the format of all of the manuals.
307 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
308 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
314 manual describes that, too.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
338 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
339 The first case is large images.
340 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
341 image and use the option
352 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
355 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
356 this doesn't work for equations yet.
359 \begin_layout Standard
360 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
361 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
369 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
376 \begin_layout Section
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
383 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
385 Just select the manual you want to read from the
392 \begin_layout Section
393 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
397 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
404 \begin_layout Standard
405 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
406 can be configured via the menu
408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
412 \begin_inset Index idx
415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
422 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 packages are available.
426 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
428 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
430 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
435 \begin_inset space \space{}
438 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
439 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
441 To force \SpecialChar LyX
442 to re-inspect your system, you should use
444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
448 \begin_inset Index idx
451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
452 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
458 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
459 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
462 \begin_layout Section
465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
467 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
474 \begin_layout Standard
475 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
476 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 installed, but you will not be
478 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
479 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
480 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
481 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
482 document can always be output as plain text
486 \begin_layout Standard
487 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 or DocBook classes or packages.
489 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
490 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
493 \begin_layout Standard
494 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
495 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
496 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
499 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
507 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
508 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
515 \begin_inset Index idx
518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
519 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
527 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 \begin_layout Chapter
539 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
543 \begin_layout Section
544 Basic File Operations
545 \begin_inset Index idx
548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 \begin_layout Standard
562 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
563 in addition to some more advanced operations:
566 \begin_layout Itemize
588 \begin_layout Itemize
604 arg "buffer-new-template"
610 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
644 \begin_layout Itemize
646 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
658 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
674 \begin_layout Itemize
676 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
684 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Itemize
718 arg "buffer-write-as"
722 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
726 \begin_layout Itemize
728 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
744 \begin_layout Itemize
758 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Standard
773 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
774 a few minor differences.
777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
788 command lists the available templates.
789 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
791 and possibly propose text fragments
793 for the document, features
794 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
797 you would otherwise need to
798 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
800 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
804 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
808 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
816 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
822 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
823 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
835 \begin_layout Standard
836 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
868 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
869 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
870 is just that — a big, blank space.
878 \begin_layout Standard
899 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
904 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
907 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
925 will reload the document from disk.
926 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
927 and want to restore it to the last save.
936 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
937 them as your changes.
940 \begin_layout Section
941 Basic Editing Features
942 \begin_inset Index idx
945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
954 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
961 \begin_layout Standard
962 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
963 can perform cut and paste operations
964 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
965 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
966 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
967 editing features and how to access
969 We will start with cut and paste.
972 \begin_layout Standard
973 As you might expect, the
977 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
978 various other editing features.
979 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
983 \begin_layout Itemize
989 \begin_inset Index idx
992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1059 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset Index idx
1068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1093 \begin_layout Itemize
1097 \begin_inset space ~
1103 \begin_layout Itemize
1107 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1121 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset Index idx
1130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1139 \begin_inset Index idx
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1167 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1173 \begin_layout Standard
1174 The first three are self-explanatory.
1175 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1176 and other programs by
1197 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1198 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1203 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1204 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1205 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1206 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1207 into individual cells.
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1216 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1217 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1221 \begin_layout Standard
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1230 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1232 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1234 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1247 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1248 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1249 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1255 \begin_inset space \space{}
1258 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1259 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1285 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1287 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1297 start a new paragraph.
1298 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1299 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1307 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1321 \begin_inset space ~
1324 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1327 paste from the primary selection.
1328 This is normally the currently selected text.
1331 \begin_layout Standard
1334 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1358 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1364 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 button to skip the current word.
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1390 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1401 If the toggle is set, searching for
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1413 will not match the word
1414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1428 Match whole words only
1430 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1431 to only find complete words, e.
1432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1461 offers also an advanced
1464 \begin_inset space ~
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1473 feature that is described in section
1474 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1480 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1489 \begin_inset space \space{}
1493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1501 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1503 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1508 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1515 \begin_layout Standard
1519 arg "inset-select-all"
1522 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1523 When the cursor is inside an inset
1526 arg "inset-select-all"
1529 selects the content of the inset.
1533 arg "inset-select-all"
1536 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1541 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1544 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1548 \begin_layout Section
1550 \begin_inset Index idx
1553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1560 \begin_inset Index idx
1563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1572 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1580 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1582 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1585 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1588 or the toolbar button
1594 to undo some mistake.
1595 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1600 or the toolbar button
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1614 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1618 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1621 \begin_layout Standard
1622 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1631 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1632 This is a consequence of the 100
1633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1636 step undo limit mentioned above.
1639 \begin_layout Standard
1648 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1650 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1654 \begin_layout Section
1656 \begin_inset Index idx
1659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1668 \begin_layout Standard
1669 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1672 \begin_layout Enumerate
1677 \begin_layout Itemize
1682 once anywhere in the edit window.
1683 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1687 \begin_layout Enumerate
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1699 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1706 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1709 \begin_layout Itemize
1710 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1720 \begin_layout Enumerate
1721 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1726 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1727 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1731 \begin_layout Section
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sec:Navigating"
1740 \begin_inset Index idx
1743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1752 \begin_layout Standard
1754 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1762 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1763 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1766 \begin_layout Itemize
1767 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1769 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1776 or by the toolbar button
1779 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1785 \begin_layout Itemize
1786 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1788 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1791 and use the same menu to return to them.
1792 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1799 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1804 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1805 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1807 \begin_inset space ~
1812 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1813 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1814 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1815 your last editing position.
1818 \begin_layout Standard
1823 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1827 \begin_layout Subsection
1829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1831 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1836 \begin_inset Index idx
1839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1840 Navigating ! Outline
1846 \begin_inset Index idx
1849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1858 \begin_layout Standard
1859 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1860 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1861 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1869 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1873 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1880 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1885 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1889 \begin_layout Standard
1890 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1891 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1892 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1893 dialog and to modify the citation.
1896 \begin_layout Standard
1901 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1902 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1904 Labels and References
1906 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1915 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1918 \begin_layout Standard
1919 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1920 you further to control the display.
1925 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1926 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1932 option keeps it in the current view state.
1933 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1941 3, the subsections of sections
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1945 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1950 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1951 \begin_inset space ~
1955 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1965 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1975 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1976 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1990 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1991 So, for example, you can move section
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1996 \begin_inset space ~
1999 2.4 or after section
2000 \begin_inset space ~
2005 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2018 (or the corresponding key bindings
2026 ) you can change the level of sections.
2027 So you can for example make section
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_layout Standard
2043 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2044 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2047 \begin_layout Subsection
2048 Horizontal Scrolling
2049 \begin_inset Index idx
2052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2053 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2061 \begin_layout Standard
2063 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2069 \begin_inset space \space{}
2073 \begin_inset space ~
2076 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2077 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2078 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2082 \begin_layout Standard
2083 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2087 \begin_layout Itemize
2089 is used on a small tablet computer
2092 \begin_layout Itemize
2093 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 \begin_inset space ~
2118 \begin_layout Itemize
2119 Math constructs with long command names
2122 \begin_layout Standard
2123 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2124 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2126 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2127 windows so that table
2128 \begin_inset space ~
2132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2134 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2139 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2141 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2142 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2145 \begin_layout Standard
2146 \begin_inset Float table
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2159 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2163 Horizontal scrolling test.
2171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2173 \begin_inset Tabular
2174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2220 \begin_layout Section
2221 Input/Word Completion
2222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2224 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2229 \begin_inset Index idx
2232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2239 \begin_inset Index idx
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2275 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2277 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2278 is used to propose completions.
2281 \begin_layout Standard
2282 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2290 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2297 \begin_inset space ~
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2306 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2310 \begin_inset space ~
2315 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2316 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2326 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2327 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2328 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2329 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2332 \begin_layout Standard
2334 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2335 completions available.
2340 key to accept a proposed completion.
2341 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2342 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2343 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2350 \begin_layout Standard
2351 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2352 ing options for text.
2354 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2356 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2358 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2361 he special math option
2365 enables characters to be composed.
2366 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2367 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2370 , you can then input the characters
2371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2382 to a formula to get it.
2383 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2384 of the math toolbar.
2385 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2389 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2390 's installation folder.
2392 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2393 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2400 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2405 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2406 In the example above,
2411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2443 \begin_layout Section
2445 \begin_inset Index idx
2448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_inset Index idx
2458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_inset Index idx
2490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2522 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2536 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2539 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2543 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2550 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2557 \begin_layout Standard
2561 \begin_inset space ~
2569 \begin_inset space ~
2590 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2594 \begin_layout Labeling
2595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2599 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2600 LatexCommand nomenclature
2602 description "Tabulator key"
2609 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2611 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2612 \begin_inset space ~
2616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2618 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2625 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2629 , especially section
2630 \begin_inset space ~
2634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2636 reference "subsec:Lists"
2642 If you are still confused, look in the
2647 \begin_inset Newline newline
2655 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2656 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2660 \begin_layout Labeling
2661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Escape key"
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2683 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2684 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2687 \begin_layout Labeling
2688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2694 \begin_inset space ~
2698 \begin_inset space ~
2705 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2706 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2710 \begin_layout Standard
2711 There are three modifier keys:
2714 \begin_layout Labeling
2715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2734 LatexCommand nomenclature
2736 description "Control key"
2741 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2742 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2746 \begin_layout Itemize
2755 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2758 \begin_layout Itemize
2767 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2770 \begin_layout Itemize
2779 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2783 \begin_layout Labeling
2784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2802 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2803 LatexCommand nomenclature
2805 description "Shift key"
2810 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2811 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2814 \begin_layout Labeling
2815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2833 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2834 LatexCommand nomenclature
2836 description "Alt or Meta key"
2841 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2842 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2843 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2849 \begin_inset Newline newline
2852 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2854 menu accelerator keys
2857 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2858 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 For example, the sequence
2864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2870 \begin_inset space ~
2874 \begin_inset space ~
2880 \begin_inset space ~
2888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2907 \begin_inset space ~
2913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2923 \begin_layout Standard
2928 manual lists all other things bound to the
2936 \begin_layout Standard
2937 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2939 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2940 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2941 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2942 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2943 The \SpecialChar LyX
2944 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2945 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2946 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2948 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2964 followed by a capital
2971 \begin_layout Chapter
2974 \begin_inset Index idx
2977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 \begin_layout Section
2989 \begin_inset Index idx
2992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3001 \begin_layout Subsection
3005 \begin_layout Standard
3006 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3007 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3008 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3009 numbering schemes, and so on.
3010 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3011 and format the title of your document differently.
3014 \begin_layout Standard
3019 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3020 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3021 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3022 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3023 picks one for you by default.
3024 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3027 \begin_layout Subsection
3029 \begin_inset Index idx
3032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3041 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3048 \begin_layout Standard
3049 You can select a class using the
3051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3056 \begin_inset Index idx
3059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3074 \begin_layout Standard
3075 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Article for basic articles
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Report for basic reports
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Book for writing a book
3092 \begin_layout Description
3093 Letter for US-style letters
3096 \begin_layout Standard
3097 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3098 only uses if you have installed
3099 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3100 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3101 distributions will include
3103 Here are some of the classes.
3104 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3115 \begin_layout Description
3116 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3119 \begin_layout Description
3120 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3124 \begin_layout Description
3125 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3129 \begin_layout Description
3130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3131 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3132 There are three article layouts available.
3133 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3134 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3135 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3136 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3141 sequential numbering
3142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3145 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3146 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3147 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3148 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Beamer Layout for presentations
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3157 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3158 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3159 with \SpecialChar LyX
3163 \begin_layout Description
3164 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3167 \begin_layout Description
3169 \begin_inset space ~
3172 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3179 \begin_layout Description
3180 Foils Used to make transparencies
3183 \begin_layout Description
3184 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3185 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3186 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3187 with \SpecialChar LyX
3191 \begin_layout Description
3192 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3193 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3200 \begin_layout Description
3201 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3204 \begin_layout Description
3205 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3206 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3207 (Is used by this document.)
3210 \begin_layout Description
3211 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3214 \begin_layout Description
3215 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3218 \begin_layout Description
3223 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3224 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3226 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3230 \begin_layout Description
3231 Slides Used to make transparencies
3234 \begin_layout Description
3236 \begin_inset space ~
3239 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3240 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3243 \begin_layout Description
3244 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3250 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3252 Special Document Classes
3259 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3260 of the document classes.
3263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3267 \begin_layout Standard
3268 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3273 \begin_inset Index idx
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3293 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3294 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3296 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3299 \begin_layout Standard
3302 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3307 , are highly specialized.
3309 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3310 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3311 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3313 by some document class.
3314 There are just too many of them.
3315 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3318 \begin_layout Standard
3319 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3327 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3328 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3329 document class for a new file.
3331 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3334 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 manual for information on how to install them.
3342 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3348 \begin_layout Standard
3349 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3350 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3351 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3352 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3353 class files to be used for dissertation
3354 s submitted to those universities.
3355 The \SpecialChar LyX
3356 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3358 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3362 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3368 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3375 name "subsec:Modules"
3380 \begin_inset Index idx
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3394 chosen document class.
3395 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3396 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3407 \begin_inset Index idx
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3421 \begin_layout Standard
3422 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3423 packages or file format converters that are not always
3424 installed by default.
3426 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3427 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3428 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3429 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3431 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3432 file without the missing prerequisites.
3433 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3434 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3441 \begin_inset Index idx
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3451 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3456 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3459 \begin_layout Standard
3460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3468 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3470 will advise you about these things.
3478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3482 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3487 \begin_inset Index idx
3490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 Document ! Local Layout
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3501 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3502 : They are intended to be used in
3503 a variety of different documents.
3504 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3505 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3506 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3507 need a specific inset or
3508 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3510 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3513 style only that one time.
3514 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3516 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3534 manual for information on how to use it.
3537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3541 \begin_layout Standard
3542 Each class has a default set of options.
3543 Here's a quick table describing them:
3546 \begin_layout Standard
3547 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3553 \begin_layout Standard
3555 \begin_inset Tabular
3556 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3557 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4016 \begin_layout Standard
4017 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4023 \begin_layout Standard
4024 You're probably also wondering what
4025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4029 \begin_inset space ~
4033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4037 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4038 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4043 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4048 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4058 headings, there are also
4066 headings, and so on.
4067 We will describe these headings fully in section
4068 \begin_inset space ~
4072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4074 reference "subsec:Headings"
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4085 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4122 \begin_inset space ~
4130 \begin_inset space ~
4135 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4137 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4138 doesn't support special options you want to
4139 use for your document.
4140 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4141 -class and its options, you have to read
4145 \begin_layout Standard
4149 \begin_inset space ~
4156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4162 \begin_inset space ~
4167 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4168 You can choose between the following five options:
4171 \begin_layout Labeling
4172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4177 Use default page style of current class.
4180 \begin_layout Labeling
4181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4186 No page numbers or headings.
4189 \begin_layout Labeling
4190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4198 \begin_layout Labeling
4199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4204 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4205 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4206 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4207 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4210 \begin_layout Labeling
4211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4217 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4223 \begin_inset Index idx
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4234 How they are defined is explained in section
4235 \begin_inset space ~
4239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4241 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4250 \begin_inset space ~
4254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4256 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paper Size and Orientation
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Document ! Paper size
4275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4277 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4285 You can find the following options in the menu
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4299 \begin_inset Index idx
4302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4311 \begin_layout Labeling
4312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4316 \begin_inset space ~
4321 What size paper to print on.
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
4332 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \begin_layout Itemize
4344 \begin_layout Itemize
4350 \begin_layout Itemize
4353 US letter, US legal, US executive
4356 \begin_layout Itemize
4362 \begin_layout Itemize
4369 \begin_layout Labeling
4370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4375 To choose whether to output as
4386 \begin_layout Labeling
4387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4391 \begin_inset space ~
4396 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4397 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4404 name "subsec:Margins"
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4419 \begin_inset Index idx
4422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4431 \begin_layout Standard
4432 Paper margins are set in the menu
4434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4438 \begin_inset Index idx
4441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 \begin_layout Standard
4451 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4452 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4453 the paper format and the font size into account.
4456 \begin_layout Subsection
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4467 That includes the paragraph environments.
4468 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4469 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4470 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4472 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4481 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4483 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4484 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4485 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4488 \begin_layout Section
4489 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4490 \begin_inset Index idx
4493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4494 Paragraph ! Indentation
4502 \begin_layout Subsection
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4506 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4515 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4520 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4521 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4522 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4526 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4532 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4533 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4534 language than English.
4536 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4540 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4541 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4542 into \SpecialChar LyX
4544 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4547 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4549 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4550 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4551 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4559 goes to produce a printable file.
4564 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4566 gives you the ability globally to change
4570 these pre-coded spacings.
4571 We will explain more later.
4574 \begin_layout Subsection
4575 Paragraph Separation
4576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4578 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4583 \begin_inset Index idx
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 Paragraph ! Separation
4595 \begin_layout Standard
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4611 \begin_inset space ~
4618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4631 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4649 dialog and toggle the
4652 \begin_inset space ~
4657 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4660 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4664 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4665 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4671 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4674 \begin_layout Subsection
4676 \begin_inset Index idx
4679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4680 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4695 \begin_inset Index idx
4698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4707 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4711 \begin_inset space ~
4720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4721 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4727 \begin_inset Index idx
4730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4737 installed to use this feature.
4742 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4746 \begin_inset space ~
4751 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4752 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4755 \begin_layout Section
4756 Paragraph Environments
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4764 \begin_inset Index idx
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4768 Paragraph ! Environments
4774 \begin_inset Index idx
4777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 Paragraph environments|(
4786 \begin_layout Subsection
4790 \begin_layout Standard
4791 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4803 } \SpecialChar ldots
4813 \begin_inset Newline newline
4816 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4818 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4819 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4820 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4829 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 A paragraph environment is simply a
4834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4841 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4842 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4843 scheme, labels, and so on.
4844 Additionally, you can
4845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4852 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4853 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4854 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4855 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4857 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4859 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4862 \begin_layout Standard
4863 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4864 \begin_inset Graphics
4865 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4871 at the left end of the toolbar.
4873 will change the environment of the
4877 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4878 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4879 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4883 \begin_layout Standard
4892 create a new paragraph using the
4896 paragraph environment.
4898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4905 because if you are in one of these environments:
4908 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4952 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4956 , rather than resetting it to
4961 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4968 reference "sec:Nesting"
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The default paragraph environment is
4985 It creates a plain paragraph.
4987 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4988 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4989 this manual) are in the
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 You can nest a paragraph using the
5001 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5009 \begin_layout Subsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5025 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5034 for thanks or contact information.
5035 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5036 places all of this on a separate page
5037 along with today's date.
5038 For other types of documents, the title
5039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5046 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5052 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5066 Here's how you use them:
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5070 Put the title of your document in the
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5078 Put the author name in the
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5086 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5087 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5093 Note that using this environment is optional.
5094 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5095 will automatically insert today's date.
5096 If you don't want a date, use the option
5098 Suppress default date on front page
5102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5105 \begin_inset space ~
5113 \begin_layout Standard
5114 You can use footnotes to insert
5115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5122 or contact information.
5125 \begin_layout Subsection
5127 \begin_inset Index idx
5130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5139 name "subsec:Headings"
5146 \begin_layout Standard
5147 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5149 takes care of the numbering for you.
5152 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5154 \begin_inset Index idx
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5158 Section headings ! Numbered
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5167 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5171 \begin_layout Enumerate
5177 \begin_layout Enumerate
5183 \begin_layout Enumerate
5189 \begin_layout Enumerate
5195 \begin_layout Enumerate
5201 \begin_layout Enumerate
5207 \begin_layout Enumerate
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5215 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5216 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5217 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5222 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5223 You group the book into chapters.
5225 does a similar grouping:
5228 \begin_layout Itemize
5233 is divided into either
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5268 \begin_layout Itemize
5280 \begin_layout Itemize
5292 \begin_layout Itemize
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Not all document types use the
5317 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5322 is the top-level heading.
5330 \begin_layout Standard
5335 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5336 labels it with its number,
5337 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5339 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5353 \begin_inset Index idx
5356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5366 The unnumbered section headings have a
5367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5374 at the end of their name.
5375 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5376 the table of contents, see section
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5391 Changing the Numbering
5392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5394 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5403 in the Table of Contents.
5404 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5406 Just as certain classes start with
5420 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5430 This is something you can change.
5433 \begin_layout Standard
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5452 \begin_inset space ~
5456 \begin_inset space ~
5461 you will see two counters.
5466 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5467 numbers a section heading.
5468 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5473 Short Titles of Headings
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5478 Section headings ! Short titles
5484 \begin_inset Argument 1
5487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5505 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5506 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5507 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5510 \begin_layout Standard
5512 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5513 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5514 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5515 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5520 \begin_inset space ~
5526 This will insert a box labeled
5527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5531 \begin_inset space ~
5535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5538 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5539 This also works for captions inside floats.
5540 There can only be one short title per title.
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 The following information applies to all section headings:
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5567 \begin_layout Itemize
5568 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5571 \begin_layout Subsection
5575 \begin_layout Standard
5577 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5591 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5592 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5593 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5594 the text they contain.
5595 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5603 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5606 \begin_layout Standard
5607 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5616 when you start a new paragraph.
5617 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5621 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5622 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5623 have to change back to the
5627 environment yourself.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5639 \begin_inset Index idx
5642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5653 time for the differences.
5662 are identical except for one difference:
5666 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5675 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5679 Here's an example of the
5692 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5694 See – no indentation!
5698 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5699 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5700 the other paragraph.
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Here's another example, this time in the
5711 \begin_layout Quotation
5717 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5718 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5719 the first line, then
5723 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5727 you were quoting other text.
5730 \begin_layout Quotation
5731 Here's a new paragraph.
5732 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5733 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 As the examples show,
5741 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5742 They should put quotes in the
5747 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5751 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_inset Index idx
5759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5766 \begin_inset Index idx
5769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5790 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5796 \begin_inset Newline newline
5799 Which I did not rehearse!
5803 It could be much worse.
5804 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5806 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5807 indented a bit more than the first.
5808 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5814 \begin_inset Newline newline
5817 And make things look fine
5818 \begin_inset Newline newline
5824 arg "newline-insert newline"
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5835 does not indent both margins.
5836 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5837 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5840 arg "newline-insert newline"
5846 \begin_layout Subsection
5848 \begin_inset Index idx
5851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5867 \begin_layout Standard
5869 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5879 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5880 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5889 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5890 lets you provide your own label.
5891 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5892 describing some general features of all four of them.
5895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5902 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5903 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5912 reset the environment to
5916 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5917 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5918 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5922 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5926 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5933 \begin_layout Standard
5934 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5935 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5936 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5938 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5939 you read all of section
5940 \begin_inset space ~
5944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5946 reference "sec:Nesting"
5953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5955 \begin_inset Index idx
5958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5974 \begin_layout Standard
5975 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5979 paragraph environment.
5980 It has the following properties:
5983 \begin_layout Itemize
5984 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5988 \begin_layout Itemize
5990 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5993 \begin_layout Itemize
5994 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5998 \begin_layout Itemize
5999 The items can have any length.
6001 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6002 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6009 \begin_layout Itemize
6014 environment inside another
6018 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6022 \begin_layout Itemize
6023 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6026 \begin_layout Itemize
6028 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6031 \begin_layout Itemize
6033 \begin_inset space ~
6037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6039 reference "sec:Nesting"
6043 for a full explanation of nesting.
6047 \begin_layout Standard
6048 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6057 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6060 \begin_layout Standard
6061 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6062 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6065 \begin_layout Itemize
6066 The label for the first level
6070 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6074 \begin_layout Itemize
6075 The label for the second level is a dash.
6079 \begin_layout Itemize
6080 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6084 \begin_layout Itemize
6085 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6089 \begin_layout Itemize
6090 Back out to the third level.
6094 \begin_layout Itemize
6095 Back to the second level.
6099 \begin_layout Itemize
6100 Back to the outermost level.
6103 \begin_layout Standard
6104 These are the default labels for an
6109 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6114 dialog in the submenu
6119 \begin_inset Index idx
6122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6128 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6132 \begin_layout Standard
6133 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6134 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "sec:Nesting"
6149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6151 \begin_inset Index idx
6154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6163 name "sec:Enumerate"
6170 \begin_layout Standard
6175 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6176 It has these properties:
6179 \begin_layout Enumerate
6180 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6184 \begin_layout Enumerate
6185 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6189 \begin_layout Enumerate
6191 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6194 \begin_layout Enumerate
6199 environment resets the counter to one.
6202 \begin_layout Enumerate
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6216 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6217 Items can have any length.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6224 \begin_layout Enumerate
6225 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6228 \begin_layout Enumerate
6229 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6242 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6244 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6245 labels the four different levels in an
6252 \begin_layout Enumerate
6253 The first level of an
6257 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6261 \begin_layout Enumerate
6262 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6266 \begin_layout Enumerate
6267 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6271 \begin_layout Enumerate
6272 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6275 \begin_layout Enumerate
6276 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6281 \begin_layout Enumerate
6282 Back to the third level
6286 \begin_layout Enumerate
6287 Back to the second level.
6291 \begin_layout Enumerate
6292 Back to the outermost level.
6295 \begin_layout Standard
6296 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6300 environment, see section
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6312 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6317 There is more to nesting
6321 environments than we've stated here.
6322 You should read section
6323 \begin_inset space ~
6327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6329 reference "sec:Nesting"
6333 to learn more about nesting.
6336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6338 \begin_inset Index idx
6341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6350 \begin_layout Standard
6351 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6355 list has no fixed label.
6356 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 of the first line as the label.
6369 \begin_layout Description
6370 Example: This is an example of the
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6379 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6392 it is meant that the first usage of the
6396 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6398 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6406 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6412 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6414 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6426 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6430 for more information.) Here is an example:
6433 \begin_layout Description
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6438 Example: This one shows how to use a
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6453 \begin_layout Description
6454 Usage: You should use the
6458 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6459 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6461 It's not a good idea to use a
6465 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6466 You're better off using
6478 paragraphs into them.
6481 \begin_layout Description
6482 Nesting: You can nest
6486 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6491 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6492 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6493 them from the first line.
6496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6498 \begin_inset Index idx
6501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6510 \begin_layout Standard
6515 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6516 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6520 \begin_layout Standard
6529 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6531 Here are its properties:
6534 \begin_layout Labeling
6535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6537 \begin_inset space ~
6540 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6549 of each line as the item label.
6554 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6555 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6556 space as described above.
6559 \begin_layout Labeling
6560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6561 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6562 uses different margins for the item label and the
6563 body of the item text.
6564 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6565 label width plus a little extra space.
6569 \begin_layout Labeling
6570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6572 \begin_inset space ~
6575 width \SpecialChar LyX
6576 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6577 If the label width is larger, the label
6578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6585 into the first line.
6586 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6587 margin of the rest of the item text.
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6593 \begin_inset space ~
6596 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6601 environment has the same left margin.
6602 \begin_inset Newline newline
6605 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6610 \begin_inset space ~
6615 dialog (toolbar button
6618 arg "layout-paragraph"
6625 \begin_inset space ~
6630 determines the default label width.
6631 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6640 multiple times instead.
6641 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6654 \begin_inset space ~
6659 every time you alter a label in a
6664 \begin_inset Newline newline
6667 The predefined default width is the length of
6668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6676 \begin_inset space ~
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6687 list the same way as the
6691 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6697 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6706 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6707 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6715 reference "sec:Nesting"
6719 to learn about nesting.
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 There is yet another feature of the
6727 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6728 left-justifies the item labels by
6730 You can use additional
6734 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6735 justifies the item label.
6740 are documented in section
6741 \begin_inset space ~
6745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6747 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6752 Here are some examples:
6755 \begin_layout Labeling
6756 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6757 Left The default for
6764 \begin_layout Labeling
6765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6773 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6776 \begin_layout Labeling
6777 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6778 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6782 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6789 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6792 \begin_layout Subsection
6794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6796 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6801 \begin_inset Index idx
6804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6814 The features described in this section require that the module
6816 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6818 is loaded in the document settings.
6819 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6825 \begin_inset Index idx
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6839 Custom Enumerate Lists
6840 \begin_inset Index idx
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6852 \begin_layout Standard
6854 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6860 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6861 There you add the command
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6885 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6886 Code, look at section
6887 \begin_inset space ~
6891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6893 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6906 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6913 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6914 For capital Roman numerals replace
6926 in the command above.
6927 For Arabic numerals use
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6942 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 You can only number 26
6968 \begin_inset space ~
6971 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6980 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6981 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6985 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6989 \begin_inset Argument 1
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Enumerate
7019 \begin_inset Argument 1
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7045 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 \begin_layout Enumerate
7079 \begin_inset Argument 1
7082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 For this list these commands were used:
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7123 \begin_inset Newline newline
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
7139 \begin_inset Newline newline
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7156 makes the label emphasized and
7165 \begin_layout Standard
7166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7175 lists until you change the definition.
7183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7189 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7197 \begin_layout Standard
7198 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7201 \begin_layout Enumerate
7202 \begin_inset Argument 1
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_inset Note Note
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 goes back to default numbering
7236 \begin_layout Enumerate
7240 \begin_layout Standard
7244 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7248 \begin_layout Standard
7249 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7254 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7255 to indicate that it is a resumed
7256 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7257 , but in the output.
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7278 \begin_layout Standard
7279 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7281 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7282 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7283 of a normal enumeration.
7284 There, insert the command
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7298 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7302 \begin_layout Enumerate
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7311 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7314 \begin_layout Enumerate
7315 \begin_inset Argument 1
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 This enumeration starts at 4
7337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7339 \begin_inset Index idx
7342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7354 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7357 \begin_layout Itemize
7361 \begin_layout Itemize
7362 with standard spacing
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7368 Add there the command
7372 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7375 \begin_layout Itemize
7376 \begin_inset Argument 1
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7406 \begin_layout Standard
7407 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7425 For more information see its documentation,
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7439 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7440 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7444 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7447 \begin_layout Enumerate
7448 \begin_inset Argument 1
7451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7459 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7472 \begin_layout Enumerate
7473 with negative indentation
7476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7477 Further Customization
7478 \begin_inset Index idx
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 Lists ! Customization
7490 \begin_layout Standard
7491 You can also change the style of description lists.
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7501 \begin_layout Standard
7502 changes the description label font, the command
7505 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 sets the list style.
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 An example where the command
7519 \begin_layout Standard
7524 itshape, style=nextline
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7531 \begin_layout Description
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7537 \begin_inset Argument 1
7540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7546 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7548 itshape, style=nextline
7558 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7559 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7563 \begin_layout Description
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7568 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7569 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7570 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7573 \begin_layout Standard
7574 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7580 \begin_inset Index idx
7583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7591 For more information see its documentation
7592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7602 \begin_layout Subsection
7604 \begin_inset Index idx
7607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7618 \begin_inset space ~
7621 Address: An Overview
7624 \begin_layout Standard
7625 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7626 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7634 \begin_inset space ~
7640 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7641 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7642 gags on the document.
7643 In contrast, you can use the
7650 \begin_inset space ~
7655 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7656 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7661 Of course, you're not limited to using
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7677 \begin_inset space ~
7682 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7683 some European academic papers.
7686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7690 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7697 \begin_layout Standard
7702 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7703 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7707 \begin_inset space ~
7712 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7713 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7714 Here's an example of each:
7717 \begin_layout Right Address
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7723 \begin_inset Newline newline
7727 \begin_inset Newline newline
7730 When is it? What is today?
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7737 \begin_inset space ~
7743 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7745 the largest block of text on a single line.
7746 Here's an example of the
7753 \begin_layout Address
7755 \begin_inset Newline newline
7758 Where do I send this
7759 \begin_inset Newline newline
7762 Your post office and country
7765 \begin_layout Standard
7766 As you can see, both
7773 \begin_inset space ~
7778 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7783 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7784 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7790 This makes sense, since
7798 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7799 Thus, you have to use
7806 arg "newline-insert newline"
7811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7812 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7814 \begin_inset space ~
7818 \begin_inset space ~
7823 ) to start a new line in an
7830 \begin_inset space ~
7838 \begin_layout Subsection
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7843 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7844 or list of references.
7846 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7851 \begin_inset Index idx
7854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7868 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7869 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7870 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7871 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7885 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7886 The book document classes ignores the
7890 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7894 in a letter document class.
7897 \begin_layout Standard
7902 environment does several things for you.
7903 First, it puts the centered label
7904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7912 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7914 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7915 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7916 the subsequent text.
7917 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7919 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7928 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7929 The new paragraph will still be in the
7934 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7935 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7938 \begin_layout Standard
7939 \begin_inset Float figure
7946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7948 \begin_inset Graphics
7949 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7957 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7962 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7983 \begin_layout Standard
7984 We would love to demonstrate the
7988 environment, but since this document is in the
7989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7996 class, we can't do this.
7997 We inserted it therefore as figure
7998 \begin_inset space ~
8002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8004 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8009 If you have never heard of an
8010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8017 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8022 \begin_inset Index idx
8025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8034 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8046 environment is used to list references.
8047 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8048 only use it at the end of the document.
8060 \begin_layout Standard
8061 When you first open a
8065 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8066 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8082 depending on the document class.
8083 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8084 Each paragraph of the
8088 environment is a bibliography entry.
8093 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8094 Each new paragraph is still in the
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8103 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8105 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8107 handling, have a look at section
8108 \begin_inset space ~
8112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8114 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8121 \begin_layout Subsection
8122 Special Environments
8125 \begin_layout Standard
8127 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8128 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8136 \begin_inset Index idx
8139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8149 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8156 \begin_layout Standard
8162 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8164 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8169 key as a fixed whitespace.
8173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8186 \begin_inset space ~
8191 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8209 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8212 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8215 arg "newline-insert newline"
8232 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8233 So, when you finish using the
8238 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8239 Also, you can nest the
8244 environment inside of others.
8247 \begin_layout Standard
8248 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8255 arg "newline-insert newline"
8258 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8263 \begin_inset space \space{}
8273 arg "newline-insert newline"
8279 \begin_layout Itemize
8283 arg "newline-insert newline"
8293 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8301 You must put at least one
8305 in any line you want blank.
8306 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8311 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8315 since that will insert
8320 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8323 arg "self-insert \""
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8345 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8349 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8350 printf("Hello World!
8355 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8359 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 This is just the standard
8365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8376 \begin_layout Standard
8382 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8384 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8385 as if you used a typewriter.
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Paragraph environments|)
8395 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8398 Program Code Listings
8403 \begin_inset space ~
8411 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8415 \begin_inset Index idx
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8427 \begin_layout Standard
8432 environment is similar to the
8437 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8438 computer console text.
8443 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8457 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8458 you can have empty lines.
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 have a certain language and a text style
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8476 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8477 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8478 and \SpecialChar TeX
8482 \begin_layout Standard
8483 Because of these properties
8487 works like a typewriter.
8491 \begin_layout Verbatim
8495 \begin_layout Verbatim
8498 The following 2 lines are empty:
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 \begin_layout Verbatim
8509 \begin_layout Verbatim
8510 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8520 environment is identical to
8524 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8525 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8532 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8536 \begin_layout Section
8537 Nesting Environments
8538 \begin_inset Index idx
8541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8542 Nesting ! Environments
8548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8557 \begin_layout Subsection
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8563 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8565 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8567 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8569 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8585 \begin_layout Enumerate
8590 \begin_layout Enumerate
8594 \begin_layout Enumerate
8599 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8604 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8605 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8625 \begin_inset space ~
8630 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8632 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8635 arg "depth-increment"
8641 arg "depth-decrement"
8655 arg "depth-increment"
8661 arg "depth-decrement"
8665 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8666 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8670 \begin_layout Standard
8671 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8672 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8673 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8674 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8675 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8678 \begin_layout Standard
8679 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8681 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8683 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 What You Can and Can't Nest
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8692 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8697 than a simple yes or no.
8698 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 Completely unnestable
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8717 environments have them:
8720 \begin_layout Description
8721 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8722 Can't nest into them.
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Description
8759 \begin_inset space ~
8762 Nestable You can nest them.
8763 You can nest other things into them.
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Description
8830 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8831 You can't nest anything into them.
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8853 \begin_layout Itemize
8859 \begin_layout Itemize
8865 \begin_layout Itemize
8871 \begin_layout Itemize
8877 \begin_layout Itemize
8883 \begin_layout Itemize
8889 \begin_layout Itemize
8895 \begin_layout Itemize
8901 \begin_layout Itemize
8907 \begin_layout Itemize
8913 \begin_layout Itemize
8917 \begin_inset space ~
8923 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8939 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8949 \begin_inset space ~
8952 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8953 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8954 nested section headings violate this.
8962 \begin_layout Subsection
8963 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8964 \begin_inset Index idx
8967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8978 affected by nesting anyhow.
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Itemize
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9004 Figures and tables in
9008 are not affected by this.
9013 Have a look at section
9014 \begin_inset space ~
9018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9020 reference "sec:Floats"
9024 for more information about
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9034 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9047 of its own, it behaves just like a
9048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9055 paragraph environment.
9056 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 Here's an example with a table:
9064 \begin_layout Enumerate
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9070 This is (a) and it's nested.
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9081 \begin_layout Standard
9083 \begin_inset Tabular
9084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9085 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9193 \begin_layout Enumerate
9198 \begin_layout Enumerate
9199 This is (a) and it's nested.
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9210 \begin_layout Standard
9212 \begin_inset Tabular
9213 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9214 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9322 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9330 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 This is (a) and it's nested.
9342 \begin_layout Standard
9343 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9351 \begin_inset Tabular
9352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9353 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9441 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9467 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9468 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9472 \begin_layout Subsection
9473 Usage and General Features
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9477 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9478 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9487 is the innermost possible depth.
9488 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9491 \begin_layout Enumerate
9492 level #1 – outermost
9496 \begin_layout Enumerate
9501 \begin_layout Enumerate
9506 \begin_layout Enumerate
9511 \begin_layout Itemize
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9527 both of them in the example.
9528 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9538 For example, if we tried to nest another
9543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9550 , we would get errors.
9553 \begin_layout Subsection
9555 \begin_inset Index idx
9558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9568 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9569 We have several examples of nested environments.
9570 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9575 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #2-a This is level #2.
9592 We created it by using
9595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9601 arg "depth-increment"
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 #3-a This is level #3.
9611 This time, we just enter
9618 arg "depth-increment"
9622 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-increment"
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9644 environment, nested inside of
9645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9653 So, it's at level #4.
9654 We did this by entering
9657 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9663 arg "depth-increment"
9666 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9671 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9687 \begin_layout Standard
9692 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9695 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9701 \begin_layout Labeling
9702 \labelwidthstring MMM
9703 #4-a This is level #4.
9707 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9710 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9715 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9719 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9724 keep nesting things inside
9725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9736 \begin_layout Labeling
9737 \labelwidthstring MMM
9738 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9743 \begin_layout Labeling
9744 \labelwidthstring MMM
9745 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9746 and this is level #6.
9747 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9751 \begin_layout Labeling
9752 \labelwidthstring MMM
9753 #5-b Back to level #5.
9757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9763 arg "depth-decrement"
9770 \begin_layout Labeling
9771 \labelwidthstring MMM
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-decrement"
9784 , we're back at level #4.
9788 \begin_layout Labeling
9789 \labelwidthstring MMM
9790 #3-b Back to level #3.
9791 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9795 \begin_layout Labeling
9796 \labelwidthstring MMM
9797 #2-b Back to level #2.
9802 \begin_layout Labeling
9803 \labelwidthstring MMM
9804 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9805 After this sentence, we will enter
9809 and change the paragraph environment back to
9816 \begin_layout Standard
9817 We could have also used the
9833 environment in place of the
9838 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9842 Example 2: Inheritance
9845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9846 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9849 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 which, we will change to the
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 environment, at level #2.
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 Notice how the nested
9886 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9890 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9894 \begin_layout Standard
9895 We ended this example by entering
9900 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9904 and reset the nesting depth by using
9907 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9914 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9923 \begin_inset Argument 1
9926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9927 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9935 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 This is level #1, in an
9940 paragraph environment.
9941 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-increment"
9960 Now, what happens if we nest an
9964 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9965 label be? An asterisk?
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9979 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9980 So, its label is a bullet.
9981 (We got here by using
9984 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9990 arg "depth-increment"
9993 , then changing the environment to
10001 \begin_layout Itemize
10002 Here's level #4, produced using
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 arg "depth-increment"
10015 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10020 \begin_layout Enumerate
10022 to get to level #5.
10023 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10028 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10032 , because we are in the
10040 environment (that is, it is an
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10060 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10061 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10065 \begin_layout Enumerate
10066 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10069 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10072 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10075 \begin_layout Enumerate
10079 arg "depth-decrement"
10082 to decrease the depth after the next
10085 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10099 \begin_layout Enumerate
10101 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10102 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10106 \begin_layout Enumerate
10107 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10116 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10121 reset the counter for the label.
10125 \begin_layout Enumerate
10129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10135 arg "depth-decrement"
10138 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10139 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10140 into the twofold-nested
10148 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 The same thing happens if we do another
10152 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10158 arg "depth-decrement"
10161 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10164 \begin_layout Standard
10165 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10170 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10181 The number of other
10185 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10192 The same rule applies for the
10196 environment, as well.
10199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10200 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10203 \begin_layout Enumerate
10204 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10205 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10206 the same detail with how we did it.
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10223 arg "depth-increment"
10230 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10231 the example in parentheses someplace.
10232 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10233 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10234 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10238 \begin_layout Enumerate
10243 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10248 Now we will add verse.
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 It will get much worse.
10253 \begin_inset Newline newline
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10273 \begin_layout Verse
10274 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10285 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10293 \begin_layout Verse
10294 Here comes a table:
10298 \begin_layout Standard
10299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10307 \begin_inset Tabular
10308 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10309 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 \begin_layout Verse
10400 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10410 arg "depth-increment"
10416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10430 arg "depth-decrement"
10437 \begin_layout Enumerate
10442 : level #1) This is another item.
10443 Note that selecting a
10447 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10448 3 times to put the table inside the
10456 \begin_layout Quotation
10457 We're now ending the
10461 list and changing to
10466 We're still at level #1.
10467 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10468 The next set of paragraphs is a
10469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10476 We will nest both the
10483 \begin_inset space ~
10488 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10492 for the letter body.
10496 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10499 to preserve the depth.
10500 Remember that you need to use
10503 arg "newline-insert newline"
10506 to create multiple lines inside the
10513 \begin_inset space ~
10523 \begin_layout Right Address
10525 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10529 \begin_inset Newline newline
10535 \begin_layout Address
10537 \begin_inset space ~
10543 \begin_layout Quotation
10544 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10548 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10549 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10550 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10551 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10552 as soon as possible.
10553 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10556 \begin_layout Quotation
10557 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10558 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10559 with your order, along with payment.
10562 \begin_layout Quotation
10563 We thank you again for your patience.
10566 \begin_layout Address
10568 \begin_inset Newline newline
10575 \begin_layout Quotation
10576 That ends that example!
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10581 gives you a lot of power with just
10583 We could have easily nested an
10604 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10607 \begin_layout Subsection
10609 \begin_inset Index idx
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 Nesting ! Separation
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10621 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10628 \begin_layout Standard
10629 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10631 For example you need two different enumerations:
10634 \begin_layout Enumerate
10639 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 \begin_layout Enumerate
10648 \begin_layout Standard
10649 \begin_inset Separator plain
10655 \begin_layout Itemize
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10662 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Enumerate
10676 \begin_layout Enumerate
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10682 list item and use the menu
10684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 Separated <Name> Above
10689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10690 Separated <Name> Below
10693 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10694 ) and before or behind it the
10696 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10700 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10701 (red arrow in LyX).
10702 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10703 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10710 arg "paragraph-break"
10717 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10720 \begin_layout Section
10721 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10722 \begin_inset Index idx
10725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10736 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10738 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10739 be broken at the end of a line.
10740 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10744 \begin_layout Subsection
10746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10748 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10753 \begin_inset Index idx
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10766 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10767 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10768 ) not to break the line at
10770 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10773 \begin_layout Quote
10774 Further documentation is given in section
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10805 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 A protected space is set with
10816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10827 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10833 \begin_layout Subsection
10835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10837 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10842 \begin_inset Index idx
10845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10846 Spacing ! Horizontal
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 The length units are listed in Appendix
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10869 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10880 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10885 \begin_inset Index idx
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 Spaces ! Inter-word
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10898 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10899 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10900 at the ends of sentences.
10901 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10902 automatically takes care about this.
10903 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10904 followed by a period; see section
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10911 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10916 To insert a normal space, select
10918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10929 arg "space-insert normal"
10935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10939 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10965 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10974 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10975 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10976 inside abbreviations:
10979 \begin_layout Quote
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10988 \begin_layout Standard
10989 or between values and units.
10990 Compare for example this:
10991 \begin_inset Newline newline
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Newline newline
11002 10 kg (normal space
11005 \begin_layout Standard
11006 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11019 arg "space-insert thin"
11025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 You can also insert the following space types:
11033 \begin_layout Description
11035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11051 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11055 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11057 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11060 space between the arrows.
11061 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11065 \begin_layout Description
11067 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11069 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11073 \begin_inset space ~
11076 space A line with a
11077 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11081 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11085 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11089 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11091 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11094 space between the arrows.
11097 \begin_layout Description
11099 \begin_inset space ~
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11106 space A line with a
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11111 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11118 negative thin space between the arrows.
11121 \begin_layout Description
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset space ~
11130 space A line with a
11131 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11135 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11139 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11142 negative medium space between the arrows.
11145 \begin_layout Description
11147 \begin_inset space ~
11151 \begin_inset space ~
11154 space A line with a
11155 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11159 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11163 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11166 negative thick space between the arrows.
11169 \begin_layout Description
11171 \begin_inset space ~
11175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11183 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11187 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11191 \begin_inset space ~
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 em) space between the arrows.
11201 \begin_layout Description
11203 \begin_inset space ~
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11215 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11219 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11223 \begin_inset space ~
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11230 em) space between the arrows.
11233 \begin_layout Description
11235 \begin_inset space ~
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11247 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11251 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11255 \begin_inset space ~
11259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 em) space between the arrows.
11265 \begin_layout Description
11267 \begin_inset space ~
11271 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11275 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11280 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 cm space between the arrows.
11290 \begin_layout Standard
11292 \begin_inset space ~
11296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11298 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11302 lists the different space sizes.
11305 \begin_layout Standard
11306 \begin_inset Float table
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11319 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11323 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset Tabular
11334 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11335 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11336 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11434 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11451 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11462 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11468 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11509 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11668 \begin_inset Index idx
11671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11681 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11682 feature for adding extra space
11683 in a uniform fashion.
11684 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11685 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11686 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11687 equally between themselves.
11690 \begin_layout Standard
11691 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11694 \begin_layout Quote
11696 This is on the left side
11697 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11700 This is on the right
11703 \begin_layout Quote
11706 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11710 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11716 \begin_layout Quote
11719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11727 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11733 \begin_layout Standard
11734 That was an example in the
11740 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11748 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11751 is one in a standard paragraph.
11752 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11756 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11759 \begin_layout Standard
11760 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11763 \begin_inset space ~
11768 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11773 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11785 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11789 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_layout Standard
11797 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11801 \begin_inset space ~
11807 \begin_layout Standard
11809 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11813 \begin_inset space ~
11819 \begin_layout Standard
11821 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
11823 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
11827 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
11828 (= opened downwards)
11831 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11843 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
11845 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
11849 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
11853 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11857 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11876 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11878 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11879 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11883 option in the space dialog.
11891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11895 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11900 \begin_inset Index idx
11903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11912 \begin_layout Standard
11913 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11914 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11921 What is correct English?:
11922 \begin_inset Newline newline
11926 \begin_inset Newline newline
11930 \begin_inset space ~
11933 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11934 \begin_inset Newline newline
11938 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 \begin_inset Newline newline
11953 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11970 \begin_layout Standard
11972 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset space ~
11985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11989 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11992 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11996 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12002 \begin_inset space ~
12006 \begin_inset space ~
12010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12013 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12022 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12023 That is why it is named
12024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12032 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12033 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12037 \begin_layout Subsection
12039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12041 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12046 \begin_inset Index idx
12049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12059 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12062 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12070 There you find the following sizes:
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12086 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12092 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12097 \begin_inset space ~
12103 \begin_inset Index idx
12106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12107 Document ! Settings
12112 for the paragraph separation.
12113 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12124 \begin_layout Standard
12130 \begin_inset Index idx
12133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12139 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12140 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12145 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12146 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12155 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12164 s are described in section
12165 \begin_inset space ~
12169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12171 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12180 If there are several
12184 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12185 You can therefore use
12189 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12197 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12204 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12223 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12235 \begin_layout Subsection
12236 Paragraph Alignment
12237 \begin_inset Index idx
12240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 Paragraph ! Alignment
12249 \begin_layout Standard
12250 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12252 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 dialog (toolbar button
12258 arg "layout-paragraph"
12262 There are five possibilities:
12265 \begin_layout Itemize
12273 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12279 \begin_layout Itemize
12287 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12293 \begin_layout Itemize
12301 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12307 \begin_layout Itemize
12315 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12321 \begin_layout Itemize
12329 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12335 \begin_layout Standard
12336 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12337 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12338 the left and right margins.
12339 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12344 This paragraph is right aligned,
12347 \begin_layout Standard
12349 this one is centered,
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 this one is left aligned.
12357 \begin_layout Subsection
12359 \begin_inset Index idx
12362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12363 Page breaks ! Forced
12369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12371 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12379 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12380 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12381 force a page break where you want one.
12382 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12383 is good at page breaking.
12384 Only if you use a lot of
12388 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12389 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12392 \begin_layout Standard
12393 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12394 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12398 have to change the page breaking.
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12404 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12407 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12409 \begin_inset space ~
12415 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12425 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12427 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12428 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12432 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12433 at the top of a page.
12434 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12436 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12437 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12438 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12442 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12446 to learn more about
12453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12457 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12462 \begin_inset Index idx
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12466 Page breaks ! Clear
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12475 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12476 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12477 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12478 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12479 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12482 \begin_layout Standard
12483 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12486 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12494 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12497 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12499 \begin_inset space ~
12503 \begin_inset space ~
12508 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12509 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12512 \begin_layout Subsection
12514 \begin_inset Index idx
12517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12526 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12533 \begin_layout Standard
12534 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12536 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12539 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12553 arg "newline-insert newline"
12557 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12560 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12574 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12577 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12579 This is useful to avoid
12580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12587 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12592 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12594 very good at line breaking.
12595 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12596 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12597 \begin_inset space ~
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12603 reference "sec:Quote"
12608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12610 reference "sec:Verse"
12615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12617 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12628 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12633 \begin_inset Index idx
12636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12645 \begin_layout Standard
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12658 \begin_layout Standard
12662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12670 you can insert horizontal lines.
12671 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12672 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12673 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12678 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12689 \begin_layout Section
12690 Characters and Symbols
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12694 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12695 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12696 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12704 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12708 for information on how this is done.
12711 \begin_layout Standard
12712 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12717 dialog via the menu
12719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12720 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12726 \begin_layout Standard
12727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12736 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12738 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12746 \begin_layout Section
12747 Fonts and Text Styles
12748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12750 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12757 \begin_layout Subsection
12759 \begin_inset Index idx
12762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12771 \begin_layout Standard
12772 There are two types of fonts:
12775 \begin_layout Description
12777 \begin_inset space ~
12781 \begin_inset Index idx
12784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12790 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12795 characters) in the font.
12796 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12797 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12798 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12799 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12800 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12801 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12802 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12803 \begin_inset Newline newline
12806 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12807 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12808 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12809 sizes than at small ones.
12810 \begin_inset Newline newline
12824 \begin_inset space ~
12832 \begin_layout Description
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12838 \begin_inset Index idx
12841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12847 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12848 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12849 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12850 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12851 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12852 image manipulation program.
12853 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12854 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12855 \begin_inset space ~
12858 pixels high up to 34
12859 \begin_inset space ~
12862 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12863 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12864 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12866 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12867 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12868 \begin_inset Newline newline
12871 Bitmap fonts are named
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12879 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12882 \begin_layout Standard
12883 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12884 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12885 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12886 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12887 use scalable fonts.
12890 \begin_layout Standard
12891 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12894 \begin_layout Standard
12895 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12902 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12903 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12904 font to emphasize text, you use an
12905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12913 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12915 In \SpecialChar LyX
12916 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12920 \begin_layout Subsection
12923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12925 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12934 used its own fonts.
12935 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12936 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12939 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12940 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12941 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12942 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12943 to a word processor.
12944 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12945 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12946 files are very portable across
12947 different machines.
12948 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12949 has increased a lot
12950 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12953 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12955 \begin_inset space ~
12959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12961 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12966 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12967 code in the document
12968 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12972 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12973 engines that are also able directly
12974 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12976 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12978 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12980 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12981 that is installed on your system.
12982 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12994 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12995 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13003 \begin_layout Subsection
13004 Document Font and Font size
13005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13007 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13012 \begin_inset Index idx
13015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13022 \begin_inset Index idx
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 You can set the document fonts in the
13037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13041 \begin_inset Index idx
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13045 Document ! Settings
13055 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13056 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13068 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13070 \begin_inset space ~
13073 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13081 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13082 This requires that you use
13094 as the output format, i.
13095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13099 \begin_inset space \space{}
13102 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13103 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13104 installed (see section
13105 \begin_inset space ~
13109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13111 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13116 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13118 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13119 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13124 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13125 cannot determine the family.
13126 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13127 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13130 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13133 \begin_layout Standard
13134 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13135 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13140 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13146 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13148 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13150 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13153 font encoding, this is
13154 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13155 , depending on the document language,
13158 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13159 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13183 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13184 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13192 \begin_inset space ~
13198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13206 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13227 European Computer Modern
13230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13238 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13241 \begin_layout Standard
13246 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13247 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13252 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13260 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13266 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13267 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13270 \begin_layout Itemize
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13279 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13297 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13298 community in order to replace
13302 as the default font.
13303 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13304 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13307 \begin_inset space ~
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 One difference is improved kerning.
13329 \begin_layout Itemize
13330 If you do not like the look of
13338 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13359 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13360 \begin_inset space ~
13363 serif and typewriter fonts,
13367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13368 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13375 \begin_inset space ~
13384 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13389 \begin_inset space \space{}
13397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13401 \begin_inset space \space{}
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13415 \begin_inset space ~
13425 but you can also select your own.
13426 \begin_inset Newline newline
13429 The differences between roman,
13432 \begin_inset space ~
13441 fonts are explained in section
13442 \begin_inset space ~
13446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13448 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13453 \begin_inset Newline newline
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13464 was originally designed for newspapers.
13465 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13466 into the small newspaper columns.
13470 \begin_inset space ~
13475 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13479 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13492 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13497 depends on the class you are using.
13498 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13501 \begin_layout Standard
13502 Note that the font size is the
13507 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13508 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13509 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13510 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13519 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13526 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13533 \begin_layout Standard
13537 \begin_inset space ~
13542 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13544 \begin_inset space ~
13547 serif or typewriter.
13552 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13562 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13570 LaTeX font encoding
13572 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13573 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13579 \begin_inset Index idx
13582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13598 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13605 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13606 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13607 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13611 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13619 \begin_layout Standard
13620 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13622 Use Old Style Figures
13626 Use True Small Caps
13629 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13632 Use Old Style Figures
13634 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13636 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13644 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13648 Use True Small Caps
13650 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13651 of scaled capitals.
13652 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13653 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13654 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13658 \begin_layout Standard
13660 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13661 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13662 provided by the font package (or the
13666 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13671 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13682 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13683 a font to display the script characters.
13687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13694 \begin_inset Index idx
13697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13704 So this has no effect for the document language
13720 \begin_layout Standard
13723 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13725 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13726 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13732 \begin_inset Index idx
13735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13737 packages ! microtype
13746 \begin_layout Standard
13749 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13751 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13757 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13763 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13764 \begin_inset space ~
13768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13770 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13780 \begin_layout Standard
13781 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13793 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13798 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13799 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13801 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13803 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13806 dialog, see section
13807 \begin_inset space ~
13811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13813 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13825 \begin_layout Subsection
13829 \begin_layout Standard
13830 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13831 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13833 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13834 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13835 choose a math font in the dialog
13837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 \begin_inset Index idx
13844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13845 Document ! Settings
13851 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13852 automatically selects a math font.
13853 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13854 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13863 \begin_inset space ~
13869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13874 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13875 document font is available.
13878 \begin_layout Standard
13879 Note that the math font will not be used for
13883 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13889 or by the insertion of the command
13896 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13901 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13902 while the math characters do not.
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13907 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13910 \begin_inset space ~
13918 \begin_inset space ~
13923 in the document font settings.
13926 \begin_layout Standard
13927 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13928 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13929 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13930 font (in most cases
13931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13937 \begin_inset space ~
13943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13946 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13947 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13955 \begin_inset space ~
13961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13967 \begin_layout Subsection
13969 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13979 name "subsec:charstyles"
13986 \begin_inset Index idx
13989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13996 \begin_inset Index idx
13999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14009 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14010 automatically changes the
14011 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14014 style for certain paragraph environments.
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14017 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14019 This is where we meet the concept of
14025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14038 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14062 e., available with all document classes.
14063 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14067 for specific purposes.
14068 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14071 \begin_layout Standard
14073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14074 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14084 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14088 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14101 — you customized the
14106 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14107 among them, encourage the use of
14119 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14120 \begin_inset space ~
14124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14126 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14131 Rather than fiddling with
14135 , they encourage the use of
14139 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14144 \begin_inset Quotes els
14148 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14151 ), not their form (
14152 \begin_inset Quotes els
14156 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14160 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14161 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14162 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14163 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14164 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14165 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14171 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14175 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14176 With a semantic markup (such as
14180 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14185 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14187 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14188 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14194 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14195 by \SpecialChar LyX
14201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14204 Builtin Text Styles
14205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14207 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14216 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14217 The two builtin text styles can be
14218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14226 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14227 both of these styles
14230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14244 \begin_layout Standard
14249 style, do one of the following:
14252 \begin_layout Itemize
14253 click on the toolbar button
14262 \begin_layout Itemize
14263 use the key binding
14270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14274 \begin_layout Itemize
14276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14284 arg "dialog-show character"
14290 arg "dialog-show character"
14293 ) as described in section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14309 \begin_layout Standard
14310 These commands are all toggles.
14315 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14318 \begin_layout Standard
14319 One typically uses the
14323 style for proper names.
14325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14332 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14342 \begin_layout Standard
14344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14349 is producing text in
14353 , but the definition can be changed.
14358 \begin_layout Standard
14360 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14370 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14377 \begin_layout Itemize
14378 clicking on the toolbar button
14387 \begin_layout Itemize
14388 using the keybindings
14395 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14399 \begin_layout Itemize
14401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14409 arg "dialog-show character"
14415 arg "dialog-show character"
14418 ) as described in section
14419 \begin_inset space ~
14423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14425 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14434 \begin_layout Standard
14439 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14446 packages use a different font
14447 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14448 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14454 \begin_layout Standard
14455 We've been using the
14459 style all over the place in this document.
14460 Here's one more example:
14463 \begin_layout Quotation
14467 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14475 \begin_layout Standard
14476 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14477 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14478 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14479 the common tendency to overuse
14480 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14491 \begin_layout Standard
14493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14494 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14495 only as font changes and integrated in the
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14506 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14519 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14522 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14527 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14529 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14535 arg "dialog-show character"
14541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14543 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14549 arg "dialog-show character"
14553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14559 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14563 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14570 \begin_layout Standard
14572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14573 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14575 \begin_inset space ~
14579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14581 reference "subsec:Modules"
14588 ), or local layout settings (see section
14589 \begin_inset space ~
14593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14595 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14600 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14604 markup for specific functions.
14605 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14610 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14620 \begin_inset Quotes els
14624 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14630 \begin_layout Standard
14632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14633 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14641 \begin_layout Standard
14643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14644 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14649 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14650 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14651 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14656 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14657 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14670 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14671 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14672 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14673 \begin_inset Flex Code
14676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14687 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14701 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14706 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14715 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14716 on screen their formal appearance.
14721 \begin_layout Subsection
14723 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14725 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14735 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14743 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14751 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14756 \begin_inset Index idx
14759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14768 \begin_layout Standard
14769 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14773 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14781 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14782 the properties of text passages
14783 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14787 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14788 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14789 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14790 from ordinary dialog.
14791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14795 \begin_layout Standard
14797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14798 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14799 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14800 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14801 the properties of the respective text passages.
14806 comes in as a last resort.
14811 \begin_layout Standard
14812 Before we document how to
14813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14814 use custom character style
14815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14816 tweak the text properties
14818 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14819 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14821 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14825 \begin_inset Newline newline
14828 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14829 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14832 \begin_layout Standard
14834 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14835 use custom character styles
14836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14837 tweak text properties
14840 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14845 \begin_inset space ~
14848 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14856 arg "dialog-show character"
14861 dialog or press the toolbar button
14864 arg "dialog-show character"
14869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14872 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14873 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14878 property that you can choose.
14879 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14887 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14889 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14900 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14901 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14902 environments all at once.
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14907 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14912 properties, and their options (in addition to
14915 \begin_inset space ~
14921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14933 \begin_layout Labeling
14934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14948 The possible options are:
14952 \begin_layout Labeling
14953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14958 This is the Roman font family.
14959 Normally a serif font.
14960 It's also the default family.
14970 \begin_layout Labeling
14971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14975 \begin_inset space ~
14982 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14994 \begin_layout Labeling
14995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15002 This is the Typewriter font family.
15008 arg "font-typewriter"
15014 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15018 \begin_layout Standard
15020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15021 The general differences of these families are:
15024 \begin_layout Itemize
15026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15031 fonts use characters with serifs.
15032 These are the small
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15041 The following example shows the difference:
15042 \begin_inset Newline newline
15046 \begin_inset Newline newline
15051 text without serifs
15054 \begin_inset Newline newline
15057 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15058 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15065 \begin_layout Itemize
15067 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15072 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15073 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15074 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15077 \begin_layout Itemize
15079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Newline newline
15114 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15130 \begin_inset Note Note
15133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15136 For more on phantoms see section
15137 \begin_inset space ~
15141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15143 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15153 \begin_inset Newline newline
15162 \begin_layout Labeling
15163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15168 This corresponds to the print weight.
15173 \begin_layout Labeling
15174 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15179 This is the Medium font series.
15180 It's also the default series.
15183 \begin_layout Labeling
15184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15191 This is the Bold font series.
15204 \begin_layout Labeling
15205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15210 As the name implies.
15215 \begin_layout Labeling
15216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15221 This is the Upright font shape.
15222 It's also the default shape.
15225 \begin_layout Labeling
15226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15236 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15246 s the Italic font shape
15252 \begin_layout Labeling
15253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15260 This is the Slanted font shape
15262 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15263 , this is different from italic).
15266 \begin_layout Labeling
15267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15278 This is the Small caps font shape
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15291 Alters the text color.
15292 Note that not all DVI
15293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15295 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15298 viewers are able to display colors.
15300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15304 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15306 \begin_inset space ~
15313 , which means that the document default color set in
15315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15322 \begin_inset space ~
15328 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15330 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15334 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15414 \begin_inset Index idx
15417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15426 \begin_layout Labeling
15427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15432 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15433 the language of the document.
15434 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15436 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15439 in blue to indicate the change
15440 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15441 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15445 \begin_inset Newline newline
15448 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15450 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15451 When using the spell checking (see section
15452 \begin_inset space ~
15456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15458 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15462 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15463 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15465 \begin_inset Newline newline
15468 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15470 Exclude from Spellchecking
15473 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15476 \begin_layout Labeling
15477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15482 Alters the size of the font.
15484 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15486 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15490 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15493 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15494 document font size.
15495 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15496 the details, but a general description of what
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15524 arg "font-size tiny"
15530 \begin_layout Labeling
15531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15552 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15586 \begin_layout Labeling
15587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 arg "font-size small"
15614 \begin_layout Labeling
15615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 It's also the default size.
15633 arg "font-size normal"
15639 \begin_layout Labeling
15640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15661 arg "font-size large"
15667 \begin_layout Labeling
15668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 arg "font-size larger"
15695 \begin_layout Labeling
15696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 arg "font-size largest"
15723 \begin_layout Labeling
15724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15745 arg "font-size huge"
15751 \begin_layout Labeling
15752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15773 arg "font-size giant"
15779 \begin_layout Labeling
15780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15785 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15805 arg "font-size increase"
15811 \begin_layout Labeling
15812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15817 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15837 arg "font-size decrease"
15844 \begin_layout Standard
15849 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15850 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15852 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15853 — use those instead.
15854 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15857 \begin_layout Labeling
15858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15870 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15871 change a few other things at the character level
15872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15873 have text passages being underlined
15877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15878 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15879 days, when you could not change fonts.
15880 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15881 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15882 because some people
15886 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15893 \begin_layout Labeling
15894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15903 This is text with emphasize on
15906 This might seem like the same as
15910 , but it is actually a bit different.
15916 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15918 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15923 \begin_layout Labeling
15924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15931 Don't use underlining.
15936 \begin_layout Labeling
15937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15939 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15962 arg "font-underline"
15968 \begin_inset Newline newline
15972 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15975 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15976 when you could not change fonts.
15977 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15978 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15979 because some people
15983 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15988 \begin_layout Labeling
15989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15993 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15995 \begin_inset space ~
16004 This is text with Double under
16005 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16016 arg "font-underunderline"
16020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16022 \begin_inset Newline newline
16025 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16026 about double underbar
16031 \begin_layout Labeling
16032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16036 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16047 This is text with Wavy under
16048 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16059 arg "font-underwave"
16063 \begin_inset Newline newline
16066 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16067 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16073 \begin_layout Labeling
16074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16081 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16087 \begin_layout Labeling
16088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16095 Don't use strikethrough.
16098 \begin_layout Labeling
16099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16105 \begin_inset space ~
16109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16120 Single strikethrough
16128 arg "font-strikeout"
16132 \begin_inset Newline newline
16135 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16136 changed in the meantime.
16139 \begin_layout Labeling
16140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16142 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16152 \begin_inset space ~
16156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16172 \begin_inset Newline newline
16175 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16182 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16183 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16184 \begin_inset space ~
16188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16190 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16197 \begin_layout Itemize
16199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16206 This is text with emphasize on
16211 \begin_layout Itemize
16215 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16222 This is text with Noun on.
16224 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16231 , this is a logical attribute.
16232 Normally it's equivalent to
16235 \begin_inset space ~
16245 \begin_layout Standard
16246 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16247 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16254 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16255 chosen a new character style
16256 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16257 applied a text property
16260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16265 \begin_inset space ~
16268 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16276 arg "dialog-show character"
16284 arg "dialog-show character"
16287 ) dialog, the settings are
16288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16292 You can activate the
16293 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16296 last applied properties
16298 by using the toolbar button
16301 arg "textstyle-apply"
16305 The button lets you apply
16306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16307 your custom character style
16308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16311 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16313 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16314 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16315 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16316 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16321 \begin_layout Standard
16322 To completely reset the
16323 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16326 text properties of a selection
16328 to the default, use
16329 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16331 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16341 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16346 from the menu of the toolbar button
16349 arg "textstyle-apply"
16356 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16357 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16358 you just set the shape to
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 \begin_inset space ~
16391 \begin_layout Standard
16393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16394 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16402 \begin_inset space ~
16414 \begin_layout Itemize
16416 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16429 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16447 \begin_inset Newline newline
16451 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16465 \begin_inset Note Note
16468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16469 For more on phantoms see section
16470 \begin_inset space ~
16474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16476 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16486 \begin_inset Newline newline
16492 \begin_layout Itemize
16494 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16499 fonts use characters with serifs.
16500 These are the small
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16509 The following example shows the difference:
16510 \begin_inset Newline newline
16514 \begin_inset Newline newline
16519 text without serifs
16522 \begin_inset Newline newline
16525 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16526 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16533 \begin_layout Itemize
16535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16540 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16541 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16542 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16547 \begin_layout Standard
16549 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16557 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16558 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16561 \begin_inset space ~
16566 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16567 the property to be removed.
16568 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16569 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16570 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16588 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16589 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16597 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16601 \begin_inset space ~
16606 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16617 If you, for example, set
16618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 \begin_inset space ~
16641 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16655 \begin_layout Standard
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16660 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16661 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16664 \begin_layout Section
16665 Printing and Previewing
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16673 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16674 using \SpecialChar LyX
16675 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16676 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16677 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16678 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16680 Additional Features
16685 \begin_layout Standard
16687 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16690 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16691 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16692 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16695 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16696 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16697 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 to turn your writing into printable output.
16699 This happens in two stages:
16702 \begin_layout Enumerate
16703 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16704 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16706 a file with the extension,
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16721 \begin_layout Enumerate
16722 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16723 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16724 to use the commands in the
16728 file to produce printable output.
16731 \begin_layout Subsection
16732 Output file formats
16733 \begin_inset Index idx
16736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16745 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16753 Simple text (ASCII)
16754 \begin_inset Index idx
16757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16758 File formats ! ASCII
16766 \begin_layout Standard
16767 This file type has the extension
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16780 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16784 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16794 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16795 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16797 \begin_inset space ~
16803 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16804 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16805 bibliography (section
16806 \begin_inset space ~
16810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16812 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16817 If your document includes such material, use
16819 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16820 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16822 \begin_inset space ~
16826 \begin_inset space ~
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16848 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16849 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16855 \begin_inset Index idx
16858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16859 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16868 \begin_layout Standard
16869 This file type has the extension
16870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16881 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16884 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16885 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16886 -Errors or to process it manually
16887 with console commands.
16888 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16889 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16890 's temporary directory whenever you
16891 view or export your document.
16894 \begin_layout Standard
16895 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16896 -file using the menu
16898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16899 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16903 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 export variants are explained in section
16905 \begin_inset space ~
16909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16911 reference "subsec:Export"
16918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16933 This file type has the extension
16934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16954 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16955 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16956 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16960 \begin_layout Standard
16961 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16962 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16963 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16964 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16965 when you view the DVI.
16966 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16969 \begin_layout Standard
16970 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16972 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16973 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16978 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16979 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16987 The latter option uses the program
16989 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16995 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16998 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16999 font access (see section
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17006 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17011 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17012 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17019 \begin_inset Index idx
17022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 File formats ! PostScript
17031 \begin_layout Standard
17032 This file type has the extension
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17045 PostScript was developed by the company
17049 as a printer language.
17050 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17052 PostScript can be seen as a
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 programming language
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17060 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17072 \begin_inset Index idx
17075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17077 packages ! pstricks
17087 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17090 \begin_layout Standard
17091 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17095 Encapsulated PostScript
17096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17099 (EPS, file extension
17100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17112 As \SpecialChar LyX
17113 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17114 convert them in the background to EPS.
17115 If, for example, you have 50
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17119 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17121 \begin_inset space ~
17124 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17125 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17127 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17128 EPS to avoid this problem.
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17132 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17134 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17135 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17143 \begin_inset Index idx
17146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 \begin_inset Index idx
17156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17165 \begin_layout Standard
17166 This file type has the extension
17167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17183 Portable Document Format
17184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 was derived from PostScript.
17192 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17201 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17202 looks exactly the same.
17205 \begin_layout Standard
17206 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17214 (JPG, file extension
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17242 Portable Network Graphics
17243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17246 (PNG, file extension
17247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17259 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17260 converts them in the
17261 background to one of these formats.
17262 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17263 will slow down your workflow.
17264 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17267 \begin_layout Standard
17268 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17270 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17276 \begin_layout Description
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17281 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17285 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17288 \begin_layout Description
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17297 ) This uses the program
17299 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17302 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17305 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17308 is a new engine, derived from
17312 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17313 access (see section
17314 \begin_inset space ~
17318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17320 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17325 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17326 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17331 \begin_layout Description
17333 \begin_inset space ~
17340 ) This uses the program
17345 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17351 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17352 font access (see section
17353 \begin_inset space ~
17357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17359 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17364 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17365 vertically written Japanese.
17368 \begin_layout Description
17370 \begin_inset space ~
17373 (cropped) This is the same as
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17381 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17382 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17383 to generate good-looking
17384 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17387 \begin_layout Description
17389 \begin_inset space ~
17392 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17396 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17400 \begin_layout Description
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17405 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17409 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17410 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17414 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17415 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17418 \begin_layout Standard
17422 \begin_inset space ~
17431 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17432 works without problems.
17433 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17434 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset space ~
17451 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17461 \begin_inset Index idx
17464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17465 FileFormats ! XHTML
17471 \begin_inset Index idx
17474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 This file type has the extension
17485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17497 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17498 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17499 When \SpecialChar LyX
17500 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17501 suitable for the purpose.
17502 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17505 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17508 between different formats, which are described in section
17510 Math Output in XHTML
17515 \begin_inset space ~
17523 \begin_layout Standard
17524 XHTML output remains
17525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17532 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17533 features are supported yet.
17537 and the World Wide Web
17541 Additional Features
17543 manual, for more information.
17546 \begin_layout Standard
17547 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17549 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17550 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17556 \begin_layout Subsection
17558 \begin_inset Index idx
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17570 \begin_layout Standard
17571 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17572 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17581 or use the toolbar button
17588 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17589 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17596 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17600 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17602 \begin_inset space ~
17606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17608 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17613 Further output formats can be selected via
17615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17616 View (Other Formats)
17618 or the toolbar button
17627 \begin_layout Standard
17628 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17629 viewer window using the menu
17631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17637 Update (Other Formats)
17642 \begin_layout Standard
17643 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17646 To have a real output, export your document.
17649 \begin_layout Section
17650 A few Words about Typography
17651 \begin_inset Index idx
17654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17663 \begin_layout Subsection
17664 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17665 \begin_inset Index idx
17668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 \begin_inset Index idx
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 \begin_layout Standard
17688 In \SpecialChar LyX
17690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17701 symbol comes in four variants: the
17718 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17724 \begin_layout Standard
17725 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17735 height_special "totalheight"
17740 backgroundcolor "none"
17743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17744 \begin_inset Tabular
17745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17746 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17747 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17748 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17749 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17750 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17819 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17842 system key combination
17846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17859 and the em dash with
17862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17875 is the Mac label for the right
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17922 system key combination or
17923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17937 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17989 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17995 \begin_layout Standard
17996 Dashes can also be inserted with
17998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18003 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18011 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18012 and 2014 for the en dash).
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18017 mode and has a length of its own.
18018 Here are some examples:
18021 \begin_layout Enumerate
18022 line- and page-breaks
18023 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18033 \begin_layout Enumerate
18035 \begin_inset space ~
18039 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18049 \begin_layout Enumerate
18050 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18051 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18061 \begin_layout Enumerate
18062 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18066 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18080 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18081 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18089 \begin_layout Subsection
18090 Dashes and Line Breaks
18091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18093 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18100 \begin_layout Standard
18101 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18102 case and locale, e.
18103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18109 \begin_layout Itemize
18110 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18111 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18114 \begin_layout Itemize
18115 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18119 \begin_layout Itemize
18120 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18121 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18126 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18137 allows line breaks after hyphens
18138 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18140 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18143 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18146 \begin_layout Enumerate
18147 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18148 \begin_inset space ~
18151 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18153 The Elements of Typographic Style
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18159 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18162 \begin_layout Enumerate
18163 Unwanted line breaks
18168 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18170 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18173 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18180 Prevent Hyphenation
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18201 in \SpecialChar TeX
18203 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18204 , a protected space does not suffice
18208 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18215 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18216 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18217 in the document language.
18218 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18232 \begin_layout Itemize
18234 \begin_inset space ~
18238 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18248 height_special "totalheight"
18253 backgroundcolor "none"
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18265 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18277 height_special "totalheight"
18282 backgroundcolor "none"
18285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18287 \begin_inset space ~
18295 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18296 \begin_inset space ~
18299 – sont très utiles.
18302 \begin_layout Itemize
18307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18320 \begin_layout Standard
18321 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18322 \begin_inset space ~
18325 – in contrast to an overfull line
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18329 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18333 \begin_layout Standard
18334 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18338 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18339 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18340 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18345 \begin_layout Enumerate
18346 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18347 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18348 or \SpecialChar TeX
18354 \begin_layout Itemize
18356 \begin_inset space ~
18359 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18360 \begin_inset space ~
18363 – sont très utiles.
18367 \begin_layout Enumerate
18368 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18369 \begin_inset Newline newline
18374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18375 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18377 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18379 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18381 \begin_inset space ~
18387 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18389 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18391 \begin_inset space ~
18402 \begin_layout Itemize
18403 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18404 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18405 should be followed by
18406 a line break opportunity.
18409 \begin_layout Standard
18410 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18411 \begin_inset space ~
18415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18417 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18428 \begin_layout Enumerate
18429 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18430 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18431 or en dashes (see section
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18438 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18449 Changes and backwards compatibility
18452 \begin_layout Standard
18453 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18455 \begin_inset space ~
18458 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18459 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18469 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18477 \begin_layout Standard
18478 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18480 \begin_inset space ~
18483 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18485 prevents ligation to dashes.
18487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18494 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18499 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18500 after the input (unless the current text font is
18508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18509 The behavior was changed since
18510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18525 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18526 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18527 as non-breakable dashes.
18528 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18540 \begin_inset space ~
18548 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18553 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18558 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18559 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18561 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18565 If you used both literal and
18566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18573 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18575 \begin_inset space ~
18578 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18579 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18582 \begin_layout Subsection
18584 \begin_inset Index idx
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18596 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18603 \begin_layout Standard
18604 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18605 but automatically in the output.
18606 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18612 \begin_inset Index idx
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 following the rules of the document language.
18624 does not hyphenate text in the
18628 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18631 \begin_layout Standard
18633 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18637 font and with unusual constructs, like
18638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18646 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18647 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18648 This is done with the menu
18650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18659 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18661 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18666 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18667 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18678 would then see the hyphen
18679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18686 as a line break possibility.
18687 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18688 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18695 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18697 Prevent Hyphenation
18702 \begin_inset space ~
18710 \begin_layout Subsection
18712 \begin_inset Index idx
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18725 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18728 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18735 \begin_layout Standard
18736 When \SpecialChar LyX
18737 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18738 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18740 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18746 appropriate amount of space.
18747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18750 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18752 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18753 gets after another word.
18756 \begin_layout Standard
18757 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18758 not work in all cases.
18760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18771 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18772 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18775 \begin_layout Standard
18776 Here are some examples of
18780 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18783 \begin_layout Itemize
18788 \begin_layout Itemize
18793 \begin_layout Standard
18794 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18797 \begin_layout Itemize
18799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18803 this is too much space!
18806 \begin_layout Itemize
18811 \begin_layout Standard
18812 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18815 \begin_layout Standard
18816 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18819 \begin_layout Enumerate
18823 \begin_inset space ~
18828 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18829 \begin_inset space ~
18833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18835 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18840 \begin_inset Index idx
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 Spaces ! inter-word
18852 \begin_layout Enumerate
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18861 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18862 \begin_inset space ~
18866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18868 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18873 \begin_inset Index idx
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 \begin_layout Enumerate
18889 \begin_inset space ~
18893 \begin_inset space ~
18897 \begin_inset space ~
18904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18906 \begin_inset space ~
18911 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18912 This function is also bound to
18915 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18921 \begin_layout Standard
18922 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18925 \begin_layout Itemize
18927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18931 \begin_inset space \space{}
18934 this is too much space!
18937 \begin_layout Itemize
18938 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18942 \begin_layout Standard
18943 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18944 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18946 will take care of this.
18949 \begin_layout Standard
18950 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18960 feature described in the section
18962 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18967 Additional Features
18972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18974 \begin_inset Index idx
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 Typography ! Quotation marks
18984 \begin_inset Index idx
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 Quotation marks | see
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 \begin_layout Standard
19020 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19021 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19022 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19032 The keyboard character,
19036 , generates this automatically.
19039 \begin_layout Standard
19040 You can specify what character the
19044 key produces by using the submenu
19050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19054 \begin_inset Index idx
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 Document ! Settings
19063 dialog and switching the
19067 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19068 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19070 \begin_inset space ~
19076 \begin_layout Labeling
19077 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19089 \begin_inset space ~
19093 \begin_inset space ~
19097 \begin_inset Quotes els
19101 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19115 \begin_inset Quotes els
19119 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19122 quotation marks (as common, e.
19123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19129 \begin_layout Labeling
19130 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19133 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19137 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset space ~
19149 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19153 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19159 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19163 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19167 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19171 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19174 quotation marks (as common, e.
19175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19181 \begin_layout Labeling
19182 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19185 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19189 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19201 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19205 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19211 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19215 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19219 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19223 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19226 quotation marks (as common, e.
19227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19233 \begin_layout Labeling
19234 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19237 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19241 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19253 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19257 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19263 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19267 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19271 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19275 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19278 quotation marks (as common, e.
19279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19285 \begin_layout Labeling
19286 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19289 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19293 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19297 \begin_inset space ~
19301 \begin_inset space ~
19305 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19309 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19315 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19319 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19323 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19327 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19330 quotation marks (as common, e.
19331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19334 g., in Switzerland)
19337 \begin_layout Labeling
19338 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19341 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19345 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19353 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_inset Quotes als
19361 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19367 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19371 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19375 \begin_inset Quotes als
19379 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19382 quotation marks (as common, e.
19383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19389 \begin_layout Labeling
19390 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19393 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19397 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19401 \begin_inset space ~
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19409 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19413 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19419 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19423 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19427 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19431 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19434 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19437 \begin_layout Labeling
19438 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19441 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19445 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19449 \begin_inset space ~
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19461 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19467 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19471 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19475 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19479 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19482 quotation marks (as common, e.
19483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19486 g., in Great Britain)
19489 \begin_layout Labeling
19490 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19493 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19497 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19501 \begin_inset space ~
19505 \begin_inset space ~
19509 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19513 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19519 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19523 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19527 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19531 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19534 quotation marks (as common, e.
19535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19541 \begin_layout Labeling
19542 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19545 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19549 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19557 \begin_inset space ~
19561 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19565 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19571 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19575 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19579 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19583 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19586 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19592 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19593 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19594 the inner marks differ).
19602 \begin_layout Labeling
19603 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19606 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19610 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19614 \begin_inset space ~
19618 \begin_inset space ~
19622 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19626 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19632 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19636 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19640 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19644 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19647 quotation marks (as common, e.
19648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19654 \begin_layout Labeling
19655 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19658 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19662 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19666 \begin_inset space ~
19670 \begin_inset space ~
19674 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19678 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19684 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19688 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19692 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19696 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19699 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19702 \begin_layout Labeling
19703 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19704 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19712 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19718 \begin_inset space ~
19722 \begin_inset space ~
19728 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19736 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19740 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19744 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19748 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19752 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19755 quotation marks (as common, e.
19756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19765 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19773 \begin_layout Labeling
19774 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19775 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19783 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19789 \begin_inset space ~
19793 \begin_inset space ~
19799 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19807 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19811 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19815 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19819 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19823 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19826 quotation marks (as common, e.
19827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19830 g., in North Korea and China)
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19836 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19844 \begin_layout Standard
19845 Inner quotation marks
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19851 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19852 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19860 does not necessarily mean
19861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19869 This is why we call them
19870 \begin_inset Quotes els
19874 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19890 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19892 \begin_inset Quotes els
19896 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19899 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19902 arg "quote-insert inner"
19907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19913 \begin_layout Standard
19914 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19915 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19916 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19917 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19918 If you check the setting
19920 Use dynamic quotation marks
19924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19925 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19928 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19929 they appear in a special color).
19930 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19931 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19936 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19939 \begin_layout Standard
19940 Individual quotation marks (i.
19941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19944 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19945 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19949 \begin_layout Subsection
19951 \begin_inset Index idx
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 Typography ! Ligatures
19961 \begin_inset Index idx
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19995 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20002 \begin_layout Standard
20003 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20004 print them as single characters.
20005 These groups are known as
20010 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20011 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20013 Here are the standard ligatures:
20016 \begin_layout Itemize
20020 \begin_layout Itemize
20024 \begin_layout Itemize
20028 \begin_layout Itemize
20032 \begin_layout Itemize
20036 \begin_layout Standard
20037 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20040 \begin_layout Standard
20041 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20042 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20050 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20066 To break a ligature, use
20068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20069 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20071 \begin_inset space ~
20078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20089 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20106 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20114 \begin_layout Subsection
20116 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20118 \begin_inset Index idx
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 \begin_layout Standard
20134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20135 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20139 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20142 \begin_layout Description
20144 The name of the game.
20147 \begin_layout Description
20149 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20153 \begin_layout Description
20155 The \SpecialChar TeX
20156 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20160 \begin_layout Description
20161 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20162 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20166 \begin_layout Standard
20167 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20173 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20181 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20182 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20183 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20184 converges to the number
20185 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20188 : The actual version is
20189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20197 , the previous one was
20198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20209 \begin_layout Subsection
20211 \begin_inset Index idx
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 \begin_layout Standard
20224 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20225 space between two words.
20226 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20236 for units use the menu
20238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20241 \begin_inset space ~
20249 arg "space-insert thin"
20255 \begin_layout Standard
20256 Here is an example to show the differences:
20259 \begin_layout Standard
20260 \begin_inset Tabular
20261 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20262 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20264 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 \begin_inset space ~
20275 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 space between number and unit
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20303 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 half space between number and unit
20328 \begin_layout Subsection
20330 \begin_inset Index idx
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20342 \begin_layout Standard
20343 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20345 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20346 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20347 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20348 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20349 These bits of text became known as
20360 \begin_layout Standard
20361 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20362 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20363 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20364 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20365 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20366 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20367 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20368 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20369 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20370 \begin_inset Newline newline
20378 \begin_inset Newline newline
20386 \begin_inset Newline newline
20389 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20390 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20391 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20393 \begin_inset space ~
20397 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20399 key "latexcompanion"
20405 \begin_inset space ~
20409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20416 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20417 's page break mechanism.
20420 \begin_layout Chapter
20421 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20424 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20431 \begin_layout Standard
20432 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20435 \begin_inset space ~
20441 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20444 \begin_layout Section
20446 \begin_inset Index idx
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20465 \begin_layout Standard
20467 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20470 \begin_layout Description
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20476 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20477 \begin_inset Newline newline
20481 \begin_inset Note Note
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20493 \begin_layout Description
20494 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20495 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20496 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20499 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20500 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20502 \begin_inset space ~
20508 \begin_inset Newline newline
20512 \begin_inset Note Comment
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20525 \begin_layout Description
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20530 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20531 set in the document settings under
20533 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20535 \begin_inset space ~
20541 \begin_inset Newline newline
20545 \begin_inset Newline newline
20549 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20559 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20564 of a comment that appears in the output.
20570 \begin_inset Newline newline
20574 \begin_inset Newline newline
20577 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20580 \begin_layout Standard
20581 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20593 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20596 \begin_layout Section
20598 \begin_inset Index idx
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20610 name "sec:Footnotes"
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20619 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20625 or the toolbar button
20628 arg "footnote-insert"
20640 \begin_inset Graphics
20641 filename clipart/footnote.png
20650 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20651 's representation of your footnote.
20661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20680 label, the box will
20684 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20685 Clicking on the box label again will close
20698 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20699 and click on the footnote
20714 \begin_layout Standard
20715 Here is an example footnote:
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20732 \begin_layout Standard
20733 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20734 position where the footnote box is placed.
20735 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20736 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20737 according to the document class.
20739 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20740 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20746 ey are described in the
20749 \begin_inset space ~
20757 \begin_layout Section
20759 \begin_inset Index idx
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20771 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20778 \begin_layout Standard
20779 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20781 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20785 \begin_inset space ~
20790 or the toolbar button
20793 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20819 appearing within your text.
20820 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20821 's representation of your margin
20830 \begin_layout Standard
20831 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20835 \begin_inset Marginal
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 This is a marginal note.
20848 \begin_layout Standard
20849 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20850 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20851 pages, right on odd pages.
20854 \begin_layout Standard
20855 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20858 \begin_inset space ~
20866 \begin_inset space ~
20874 \begin_layout Section
20875 Graphics and Images
20876 \begin_inset Index idx
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 \begin_inset Index idx
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20898 name "sec:Graphics"
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20906 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20907 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20910 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20919 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20922 \begin_layout Standard
20923 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20928 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20929 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20931 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20932 \begin_inset space ~
20936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20938 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20945 \begin_layout Standard
20950 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20951 of the image in the output.
20952 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20956 \begin_inset space ~
20960 \begin_inset space ~
20969 \begin_inset space ~
20973 \begin_inset space ~
20977 \begin_inset space ~
20982 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20983 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20991 \begin_layout Standard
20995 \begin_inset space ~
20999 \begin_inset space ~
21004 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21005 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21007 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21012 \begin_inset space ~
21017 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21018 with the image size is printed.
21021 \begin_layout Standard
21022 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21023 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21025 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21028 \begin_layout Standard
21030 \begin_inset Graphics
21031 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21039 \begin_layout Standard
21040 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21041 the image into a float, see section
21042 \begin_inset space ~
21046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21048 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21055 \begin_layout Subsection
21057 \begin_inset Index idx
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21069 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21076 \begin_layout Standard
21077 You can insert images in any known file format.
21078 But as we explained in section
21079 \begin_inset space ~
21083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21085 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21089 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21091 therefore uses the program
21095 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21096 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21097 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21098 \begin_inset space ~
21102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21104 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21111 \begin_layout Standard
21112 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21115 \begin_layout Description
21117 \begin_inset space ~
21120 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21121 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21122 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21126 Graphics Interchange Format
21127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21130 (GIF, file extension
21131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21143 \begin_inset Index idx
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21178 Portable Network Graphics
21179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21182 (PNG, file extension
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21195 \begin_inset Index idx
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21230 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21234 (JPG, file extension
21235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21259 \begin_inset Index idx
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 \begin_layout Description
21295 \begin_inset space ~
21298 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21300 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21301 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21302 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21303 \begin_inset Newline newline
21306 Scalable image formats can be
21307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21310 Scalable Vector Graphics
21311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21314 (SVG, file extension
21315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21327 \begin_inset Index idx
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21362 Encapsulated PostScript
21363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21366 (EPS, file extension
21367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21379 \begin_inset Index idx
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21414 Portable Document Format
21415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21418 (PDF, file extension
21419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21431 \begin_inset Index idx
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21449 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21450 result will not be scalable.
21451 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21465 \begin_layout Standard
21466 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21473 \begin_layout Subsection
21474 Grouping of Image Settings
21475 \begin_inset Index idx
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 Images ! Settings grouping
21487 \begin_layout Standard
21488 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21490 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21491 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21493 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21494 need to manually change each of them.
21498 \begin_layout Standard
21499 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21502 \begin_inset space ~
21506 \begin_inset space ~
21518 \begin_inset space ~
21522 \begin_inset space ~
21528 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21529 and checking the name of the desired group.
21532 \begin_layout Section
21534 \begin_inset Index idx
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21553 \begin_layout Standard
21554 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21557 arg "tabular-insert"
21562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21566 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21567 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21568 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21571 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21572 from the rest of the table.
21573 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21574 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21576 Here is an example table:
21579 \begin_layout Standard
21581 \begin_inset Tabular
21582 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21583 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21584 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21585 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21586 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21789 \begin_layout Standard
21791 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21792 This corresponds to the
21793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21800 table style listed in the style selection.
21803 \begin_layout Standard
21805 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21806 Other available styles include:
21809 \begin_layout Itemize
21811 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21820 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21824 \begin_layout Itemize
21826 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21827 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21830 \begin_layout Itemize
21832 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21841 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21842 bold top/bottom lines (see
21853 \begin_layout Standard
21855 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21856 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21857 button can be changed in
21859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21864 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21868 \begin_layout Subsection
21872 \begin_layout Standard
21873 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21876 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21880 This brings up the table dialog.
21881 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21882 cursor is placed currently.
21883 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21884 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21885 done on all of your selection.
21888 \begin_layout Standard
21889 In addition to the table dialog, the
21892 \begin_inset space ~
21897 helps you in setting table properties.
21898 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21901 \begin_layout Standard
21905 \begin_inset space ~
21910 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21911 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21912 current cell respectively.
21913 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21915 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21916 of text, see section
21917 \begin_inset space ~
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21923 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21932 using the check box
21941 This will merge the cells to
21945 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21946 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21947 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21948 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21949 in the last row without the upper border:
21952 \begin_layout Standard
21954 \begin_inset Tabular
21955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21956 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21958 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 \begin_layout Standard
22092 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22093 -arguments for the table.
22094 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22095 explained in the chapter
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22108 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22109 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22110 but are visible in the output.
22113 \begin_layout Standard
22114 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 Most DVI-viewers are
22126 able to display rotations.
22134 \begin_layout Standard
22139 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22144 adds lines for all cell borders.
22147 \begin_layout Subsection
22149 \begin_inset Index idx
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 Tables ! Multi-page
22159 \begin_inset Index idx
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_layout Standard
22172 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22175 \begin_inset space ~
22179 \begin_inset space ~
22187 \begin_inset space ~
22192 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22193 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22196 \begin_layout Description
22201 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22202 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22203 Except for the first page, if
22206 \begin_inset space ~
22214 \begin_layout Description
22218 \begin_inset space ~
22223 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22224 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22227 \begin_layout Description
22232 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22233 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22234 except for the last page, if
22237 \begin_inset space ~
22245 \begin_layout Description
22249 \begin_inset space ~
22254 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22255 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22258 \begin_layout Description
22259 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22260 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22266 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22269 \begin_inset space ~
22277 \begin_layout Standard
22278 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22279 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22280 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22286 In this context, first means first in this order:
22289 \begin_inset space ~
22301 \begin_inset space ~
22306 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22309 \begin_layout Standard
22311 \begin_inset Tabular
22312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22313 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22314 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22315 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22316 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22317 <row endfirsthead="true">
22318 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22329 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <row endfirsthead="true">
22349 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <row endhead="true">
22382 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <row endhead="true">
22413 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 <row endfoot="true">
22446 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <row endlastfoot="true">
24428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 \begin_layout Subsection
24467 \begin_inset Index idx
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24479 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24486 \begin_layout Standard
24487 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24488 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24489 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24490 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24494 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24499 for the column in the table dialog.
24500 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24501 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24507 \begin_inset Tabular
24508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24509 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24511 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24512 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 This is longer now.
24662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24713 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24714 This is longer now.
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 \begin_layout Standard
24746 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24747 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24753 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24759 Selection with the mouse or with
24763 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24764 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24765 the selection from outside the table.
24768 \begin_layout Section
24770 \begin_inset Index idx
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24789 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24794 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24795 have a fixed location.
24797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24804 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24812 \begin_inset space ~
24817 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24818 too many notes on the current page.
24821 \begin_layout Standard
24822 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24823 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24824 and pages without text.
24825 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24826 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24827 Floats are therefore numbered.
24828 Referencing is described in section
24829 \begin_inset space ~
24833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24835 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24842 \begin_layout Standard
24843 To insert a float, use the menu
24845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24850 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24852 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24853 \begin_inset Index idx
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24863 paragraph within the float.
24864 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24865 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24866 left-clicking on the box label.
24867 A closed float box looks like this:
24868 \begin_inset Graphics
24869 filename clipart/float.png
24874 – a gray button with a red label.
24877 \begin_layout Standard
24878 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24880 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24883 \begin_layout Subsection
24885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24887 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24892 \begin_inset Index idx
24895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 Floats ! Figure floats
24904 \begin_layout Standard
24906 \begin_inset space ~
24910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24912 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24916 was created using the menu
24918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24919 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24925 arg "float-insert figure"
24929 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24938 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24942 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24943 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24945 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24947 \begin_inset space ~
24955 arg "layout-paragraph"
24961 \begin_layout Standard
24962 \begin_inset Float figure
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 \begin_inset Graphics
24972 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24987 name "fig:A-star-in"
25004 \begin_layout Standard
25005 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25006 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25017 ) and refer to it using the menu
25019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25025 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25029 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25030 vague references like
25031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25038 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25039 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25049 For more about cross-references, see section
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25056 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25063 \begin_layout Standard
25064 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25065 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25066 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25067 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25068 as described in section
25069 \begin_inset space ~
25073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25075 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25081 \begin_inset space ~
25085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25087 reference "fig:Two-images"
25091 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25092 You can also set the images one below the other.
25094 \begin_inset space ~
25098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25100 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25107 reference "fig:Star"
25111 are the subfigures.
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25115 \begin_inset Float figure
25122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25127 \begin_inset Float figure
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25140 name "fig:Undefinable"
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset Graphics
25154 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25166 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25170 \begin_inset Float figure
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25178 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25196 \begin_inset Graphics
25197 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25209 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25221 name "fig:Two-images"
25238 \begin_layout Subsection
25240 \begin_inset Index idx
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 Floats ! Table floats
25252 \begin_layout Standard
25253 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25256 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25259 or the toolbar button
25262 arg "float-insert table"
25266 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25267 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25268 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25270 \begin_inset space ~
25274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25276 reference "tab:Table-float"
25283 \begin_layout Standard
25284 \begin_inset Float table
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25297 name "tab:Table-float"
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 \begin_inset Tabular
25312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25313 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25316 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25467 \end{array}\right]$
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25509 \begin_layout Subsection
25511 \begin_inset Index idx
25514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 \begin_layout Standard
25525 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25526 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25527 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25529 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25537 \begin_inset space ~
25545 \begin_layout Section
25547 \begin_inset Index idx
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25559 \begin_layout Standard
25561 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25563 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25564 \begin_inset space \space{}
25571 \begin_layout Standard
25572 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25573 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25579 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25580 and its alignment within the page.
25583 \begin_layout Standard
25585 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25595 height_special "totalheight"
25600 backgroundcolor "none"
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 This is a minipage.
25607 The text is set in an italic style.
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25613 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25614 another formatting.
25622 \begin_layout Standard
25623 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25626 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25630 as described in section
25631 \begin_inset space ~
25635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25637 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25642 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25659 height_special "totalheight"
25664 backgroundcolor "none"
25667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25668 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25669 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25675 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25679 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25689 height_special "totalheight"
25694 backgroundcolor "none"
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25698 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25699 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25707 \begin_layout Standard
25708 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25714 \begin_layout Standard
25715 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25717 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25724 \begin_inset space ~
25732 \begin_layout Chapter
25733 Mathematical Formulas
25734 \begin_inset Index idx
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 \begin_inset Index idx
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25778 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25785 \begin_layout Standard
25786 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25791 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25794 \begin_layout Section
25796 \begin_inset Index idx
25799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 \begin_layout Standard
25809 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25822 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25824 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25825 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25826 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25839 \begin_inset space ~
25844 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25847 \begin_layout Standard
25848 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25849 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 This is a line with an inline formula
25854 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25860 \begin_layout Standard
25861 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25862 paragraph, like this one:
25863 \begin_inset Formula
25870 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25873 \begin_layout Standard
25875 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25877 For example, typing
25878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25891 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25892 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25896 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25899 \begin_inset space ~
25907 \begin_layout Subsection
25908 Navigating in Formulas
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25922 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25923 achieved with the arrow keys.
25925 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25926 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25931 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25932 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25936 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25940 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25943 \end{array}\right]$
25951 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25956 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25957 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25960 \begin_layout Standard
25965 , printed in this document as
25966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25977 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25978 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25979 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25984 For example, if you want
25985 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25993 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26003 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26007 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26012 , since in the latter case only the
26015 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26020 will be under the square root sign:
26021 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26027 \begin_layout Standard
26028 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26030 \begin_inset Formula
26032 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26041 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26042 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26045 \begin_layout Subsection
26049 \begin_layout Standard
26050 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26051 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26055 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26056 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26057 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26058 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26059 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26063 \begin_layout Subsection
26064 Exponents and Subscripts
26065 \begin_inset Index idx
26068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26075 \begin_inset Index idx
26078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26091 arg "math-superscript"
26097 arg "math-subscript"
26100 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26102 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26105 , type in a formula
26108 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26118 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26124 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26128 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26134 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26140 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26149 , you have to use an extra
26153 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26154 For example, if you want
26155 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26161 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26167 Subscripts are similar: To get
26168 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26182 \begin_layout Subsection
26184 \begin_inset Index idx
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26197 Create a fraction either with the command
26203 or by using the icon
26206 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26212 \begin_inset space ~
26218 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26219 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26220 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26225 To move back up, press
26230 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26231 \begin_inset Formula
26233 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26236 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26244 \begin_layout Subsection
26246 \begin_inset Index idx
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26259 Roots can be created using the
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26270 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26276 arg "math-insert \\root"
26298 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26304 always produces a square root.
26307 \begin_layout Subsection
26308 Operators with Limits
26309 \begin_inset Index idx
26312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26319 \begin_inset Index idx
26322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26331 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26338 \begin_layout Standard
26340 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26344 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26347 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26348 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26349 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26350 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26351 The sum operator will automatically place its
26352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26359 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26361 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26365 \begin_inset Formula
26367 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26372 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26376 \begin_layout Standard
26377 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26379 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26380 behind the operator and using the menu
26382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26383 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26389 \begin_inset space ~
26403 \begin_layout Standard
26404 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26413 \begin_inset Index idx
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 \begin_inset Formula
26425 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26430 which will place the
26431 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26443 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26444 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26450 \begin_layout Standard
26451 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26458 Have a look at section
26459 \begin_inset space ~
26463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26465 reference "subsec:Functions"
26469 for an explanation of function macros.
26472 \begin_layout Subsection
26474 \begin_inset Index idx
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26486 \begin_layout Standard
26487 Most math symbols can be found in the
26490 \begin_inset space ~
26495 under one of several categories; including
26512 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26516 \begin_layout Standard
26517 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26518 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26519 don't have to use the
26522 \begin_inset space ~
26527 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26529 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26532 \begin_layout Subsection
26534 \begin_inset Index idx
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26553 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26559 \begin_inset space ~
26567 arg "math-insert \\space"
26571 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26572 For example, the sequence
26577 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26580 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26582 \begin_inset Graphics
26583 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26588 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26589 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26590 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26591 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26592 , because they are negative
26594 Here are two examples:
26597 \begin_layout Standard
26607 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26623 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26629 \begin_layout Subsection
26631 \begin_inset Index idx
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26643 name "subsec:Functions"
26650 \begin_layout Standard
26654 \begin_inset space ~
26659 contains under the button
26662 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26665 a number of function macros, such as
26666 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26670 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26678 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26685 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26686 avoid confusions, because
26687 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26691 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26697 \begin_layout Standard
26698 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26700 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26704 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26710 \begin_layout Standard
26711 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26712 are placed, as described in section
26713 \begin_inset space ~
26717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26719 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26726 \begin_layout Subsection
26728 \begin_inset Index idx
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26743 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26744 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26745 commands, for example, to enter
26746 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26749 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26750 Our example is entered by typing
26755 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26762 \begin_inset space ~
26766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26768 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26772 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 \begin_inset Float table
26783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26789 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26793 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Tabular
26804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26805 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26892 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26946 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27000 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27054 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27108 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27216 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27324 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27394 \begin_inset space ~
27402 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27405 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27409 \begin_layout Section
27410 Brackets and Delimiters
27411 \begin_inset Index idx
27414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 \begin_inset Index idx
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27433 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27440 \begin_layout Standard
27441 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27443 For some purposes, using just the keys
27448 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27449 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27450 toolbar delimiter icon
27453 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27457 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27458 \begin_inset Formula
27460 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27468 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27469 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27473 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27476 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27482 \begin_inset Formula
27484 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27494 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27500 left side and right side.
27501 If you use the option
27504 \begin_inset space ~
27509 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27510 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27512 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27517 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27518 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27521 \begin_layout Standard
27522 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27523 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27524 is to go inside the brackets.
27525 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27530 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27531 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27532 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27536 arg "math-delim ( )"
27542 \begin_layout Section
27543 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27544 \begin_inset Index idx
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 \begin_inset Index idx
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27564 \begin_inset Index idx
27567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27568 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27577 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27581 \begin_inset space ~
27589 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27593 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27594 Here is an example:
27595 \begin_inset Formula
27597 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27606 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27607 \begin_inset space ~
27611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27613 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27618 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27619 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27620 This alignment is set in the box
27625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27674 for every column as default.
27675 For example, the sequence
27676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27687 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27688 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27689 corresponds to the relevant column.
27690 The result will look like this:
27691 \begin_inset Formula
27694 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27695 column & has & has\,right\\
27696 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27706 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27709 arg "newline-insert newline"
27712 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27713 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27718 or the math toolbar.
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27723 It can be created with the menu
27725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27726 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27728 \begin_inset space ~
27740 Here is an example:
27741 \begin_inset Formula
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27756 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27759 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27762 arg "newline-insert newline"
27766 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27771 arg "newline-insert newline"
27774 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27782 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27783 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27784 A new row is created by every further entry of
27787 arg "newline-insert newline"
27791 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27792 Here is an example:
27793 \begin_inset Formula
27795 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27796 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27801 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27802 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27803 \begin_inset Formula
27805 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27813 \begin_layout Standard
27814 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27821 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27822 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27825 reference "eq:asquared"
27830 The other types are described in section
27831 \begin_inset space ~
27835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27837 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27844 \begin_layout Section
27845 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27846 \begin_inset Index idx
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 Math ! Formula numbering
27856 \begin_inset Index idx
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27860 Math ! Referencing formulas
27866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27868 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27876 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27878 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27879 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27881 \begin_inset space ~
27885 \begin_inset space ~
27893 arg "math-number-toggle"
27897 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27898 within parentheses.
27899 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27900 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27901 the document class.
27902 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27903 separated by a dot:
27904 \begin_inset Formula
27914 arg "math-number-toggle"
27917 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27918 You can only number displayed formulas.
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27925 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27927 \begin_inset space ~
27931 \begin_inset space ~
27939 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27942 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27943 \begin_inset Formula
27946 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27952 To number all lines use the shortcut
27955 arg "math-number-toggle"
27961 \begin_layout Standard
27962 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27965 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27966 A label is inserted with the menu
27968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27977 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27978 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27979 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27991 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27992 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27993 We inserted in the following example the label
27994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28001 in the second line:
28002 \begin_inset Formula
28004 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28005 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28010 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28011 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28012 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28016 \begin_inset space ~
28024 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28028 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28029 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28030 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28031 as the formula number:
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28038 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28046 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28047 's cross-reference box are described in section
28048 \begin_inset space ~
28052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28054 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28059 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28067 \begin_layout Section
28068 User defined math macros
28069 \begin_inset Index idx
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28081 \begin_layout Standard
28083 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28084 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28085 Math macros are explained in section
28088 \begin_inset space ~
28100 \begin_layout Section
28104 \begin_layout Subsection
28106 \begin_inset Index idx
28109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28118 \begin_layout Standard
28119 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28120 To set a font in a formula, use the
28123 \begin_inset space ~
28131 arg "math-insert \\font"
28134 , or enter its command, listed in table
28135 \begin_inset space ~
28139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28141 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28148 \begin_layout Standard
28149 \begin_inset Float table
28156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28157 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28162 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28166 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28176 \begin_inset Tabular
28177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28212 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28348 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28354 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28355 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28368 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28384 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28440 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28446 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28454 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28467 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28483 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28526 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28529 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28531 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28535 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28554 \begin_layout Standard
28555 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28556 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28561 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28562 space when you need a space in the box.
28563 Here is an example where
28564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28575 denotes the set of numbers:
28576 \begin_inset Formula
28578 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28587 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28588 You can, for example, put a character in
28597 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28601 \begin_inset Newline newline
28604 So it is better not to use this feature.
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28608 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28609 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28613 \begin_inset Newline newline
28616 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28622 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28623 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28636 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28639 \begin_layout Standard
28640 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28645 \begin_inset space ~
28653 \begin_layout Subsection
28655 \begin_inset Index idx
28658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28667 \begin_layout Standard
28668 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28670 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28674 \begin_inset space ~
28678 \begin_inset space ~
28686 \begin_inset space ~
28694 arg "math-insert \\font"
28698 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28699 in black instead of blue.
28700 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28701 Here is an example:
28702 \begin_inset Formula
28705 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28706 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28715 \begin_layout Subsection
28717 \begin_inset Index idx
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28731 automatically chosen in most situations.
28749 For most characters,
28757 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28758 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28763 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28764 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28765 thinks are appropriate.
28766 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28769 arg "math-insert \\style"
28773 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28774 For example, you can set
28775 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28778 , which is normally in
28787 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28791 The four styles are used in the following example:
28794 \begin_layout Standard
28795 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28799 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28803 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28807 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28814 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28815 is set in a particular size with the menu
28817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28819 \begin_inset space ~
28824 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28825 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28826 will be adjusted to correspond.
28827 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28838 \begin_layout Standard
28842 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28848 \begin_layout Section
28849 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28851 \begin_inset Index idx
28854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 \begin_inset Index idx
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28873 \begin_layout Standard
28875 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28876 that are in common use.
28879 \begin_layout Subsection
28880 Enabling AMS-Support
28883 \begin_layout Standard
28884 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28885 the document by selecting the checkbox
28888 \begin_inset space ~
28892 \begin_inset space ~
28896 \begin_inset space ~
28903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28907 \begin_inset Index idx
28910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28911 Document ! Settings
28919 \begin_inset space ~
28925 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28926 -errors in formulas,
28927 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28930 \begin_layout Subsection
28932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28934 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28939 \begin_inset Index idx
28942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28943 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28952 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28953 provides a selection of different formula types.
28955 allows you to choose between
28976 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28984 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28987 \begin_layout Chapter
28991 \begin_layout Section
28993 \begin_inset Index idx
28996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29005 name "sec:Cross-References"
29012 \begin_layout Standard
29013 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29014 's strengths is cross-references.
29015 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29017 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29018 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29019 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29022 \begin_layout Enumerate
29026 \begin_layout Enumerate
29027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29029 name "enu:Second-item"
29036 \begin_layout Enumerate
29040 \begin_layout Standard
29041 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29046 or by pressing the toolbar button
29053 A gray label box like this:
29054 \begin_inset Graphics
29055 filename clipart/label.png
29059 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29061 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29096 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29097 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29119 or the toolbar button
29122 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29126 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29127 \begin_inset Graphics
29128 filename clipart/reference.png
29132 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29134 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29147 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29151 \begin_layout Standard
29152 As an alternative to
29154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29157 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29162 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29163 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29177 \begin_layout Standard
29178 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29179 \begin_inset space ~
29183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29185 reference "enu:Second-item"
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29193 It is recommended to use a protected space
29197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29198 described in section
29199 \begin_inset space ~
29203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29205 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29214 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29215 line breaks between them.
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29222 \begin_layout Description
29223 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29226 reference "fig:Two-images"
29233 \begin_layout Description
29234 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29235 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29247 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29254 \begin_layout Description
29255 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29256 \begin_inset space ~
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29261 LatexCommand pageref
29262 reference "fig:Two-images"
29269 \begin_layout Description
29271 \begin_inset space ~
29275 \begin_inset space ~
29278 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29280 LatexCommand vpageref
29281 reference "fig:Two-images"
29286 \begin_inset Newline newline
29289 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29290 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29291 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29292 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29293 it prints “on the next page”.
29294 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29297 \begin_layout Description
29299 \begin_inset space ~
29303 \begin_inset space ~
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29310 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29313 reference "fig:Two-images"
29318 \begin_inset Newline newline
29321 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29327 ; otherwise it behaves like
29331 \begin_inset space ~
29335 \begin_inset space ~
29344 \begin_layout Description
29346 \begin_inset space ~
29349 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29350 \begin_inset Newline newline
29354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29362 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29372 \begin_inset Index idx
29375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 packages ! prettyref
29383 \begin_inset Index idx
29386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29388 packages ! refstyle
29399 \begin_inset Newline newline
29402 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29403 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29406 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29411 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29419 is the default and preferred because
29423 supports only English documents.
29424 The format is specified by using the command
29436 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29437 preamble of the document.
29438 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29456 \begin_inset Newline newline
29463 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29468 \begin_inset Newline newline
29479 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29480 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29482 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29483 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29488 , you might do so as follows:
29489 \begin_inset Newline newline
29496 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29501 \begin_inset Newline newline
29504 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29505 the package documentation
29506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29508 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29514 \begin_inset Newline newline
29525 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29532 \begin_layout Description
29534 \begin_inset space ~
29537 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29539 LatexCommand nameref
29540 reference "fig:Two-images"
29547 \begin_layout Description
29549 \begin_inset space ~
29552 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29553 label for the reference:
29554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29555 LatexCommand labelonly
29556 reference "fig:Two-images"
29561 \begin_inset Newline newline
29564 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29565 Code, if you want to issue a command
29566 that \SpecialChar LyX
29572 , then you may want to use the
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29580 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29590 This is the form needed for e.
29591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29595 \begin_inset space \space{}
29602 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29603 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29605 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29609 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29613 \begin_layout Standard
29614 You can only use the style
29618 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29622 is always possible.
29625 \begin_layout Standard
29626 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29627 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29629 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29630 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29636 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29643 \begin_layout Standard
29644 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29648 \begin_inset space ~
29652 \begin_inset space ~
29657 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29658 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29661 \begin_inset space ~
29666 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29667 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29670 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 You can change labels at any time.
29678 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29679 do not need to think about this.
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29683 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29685 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29690 References are described in detail in the section
29691 \begin_inset space ~
29701 \begin_inset space ~
29709 \begin_layout Section
29710 Table of Contents and other Listings
29711 \begin_inset Index idx
29714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29721 \begin_inset Index idx
29724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29725 Navigating ! Outline
29731 \begin_inset Index idx
29734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29750 \begin_layout Subsection
29752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29754 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29761 \begin_layout Standard
29762 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29765 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29767 \begin_inset space ~
29771 \begin_inset space ~
29777 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29779 If you click on it, the
29783 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29784 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29785 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29787 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29789 \begin_inset space ~
29794 that is described in section
29795 \begin_inset space ~
29799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29801 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29809 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29810 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29812 \begin_inset space ~
29816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29818 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29822 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29824 \begin_inset space ~
29828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29830 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29834 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29836 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29839 \begin_layout Subsection
29840 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29843 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29850 \begin_layout Standard
29851 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29853 You can insert them via the
29855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29856 List/Contents/References
29859 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29862 \begin_layout Section
29863 URLs and Hyperlinks
29864 \begin_inset Index idx
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_inset Index idx
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29886 \begin_layout Subsection
29888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29906 \begin_layout Standard
29907 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29909 \begin_inset Flex URL
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29914 https://www.lyx.org
29922 \begin_layout Standard
29923 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29929 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29942 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29951 \begin_layout Subsection
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29955 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29968 or with the toolbar button
29975 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29984 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29985 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29988 name "LyX's homepage"
29989 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29994 , an Email address like this:
29995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29997 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29998 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30004 , or a link to a file.
30009 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30018 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30031 to the link target.
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30036 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30037 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30038 the text style dialog.
30039 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30045 name "LyX's homepage"
30046 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30054 \begin_layout Standard
30055 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30059 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30066 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30068 \begin_inset Newline newline
30076 \begin_inset Newline newline
30083 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30084 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30088 \begin_layout Section
30090 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30092 \begin_inset Index idx
30095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30104 name "sec:Counters"
30111 \begin_layout Standard
30113 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30114 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30115 is its ability to manage counters.
30116 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30117 modify counters directly.
30118 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30120 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30121 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30122 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30123 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30124 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30128 \begin_layout Standard
30130 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30131 There are five commands you can use:
30134 \begin_layout Enumerate
30136 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30137 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30140 \begin_layout Enumerate
30142 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30143 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30144 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30147 \begin_layout Enumerate
30149 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30150 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30153 \begin_layout Enumerate
30155 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30156 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30160 \begin_layout Enumerate
30162 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30163 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30166 \begin_layout Standard
30168 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30169 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30170 those that are available in the current document class.
30175 \begin_layout Section
30177 \begin_inset Index idx
30180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30189 name "sec:Appendices"
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 Appendices are created with the menu
30199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30201 \begin_inset space ~
30205 \begin_inset space ~
30211 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30212 as the appendix part of the book.
30213 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30217 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30218 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30219 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30220 and the subsection number.
30221 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30227 \begin_inset space ~
30231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30233 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30241 \begin_inset space ~
30245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30247 reference "subsec:Export"
30254 \begin_layout Section
30256 \begin_inset Index idx
30259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30268 name "sec:Bibliography"
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30276 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30278 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30279 \begin_inset space ~
30283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30285 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30292 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30297 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30304 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30309 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30310 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30311 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30315 using a bibliography database.
30318 \begin_layout Standard
30319 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30320 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30324 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30325 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30326 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30327 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30328 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30331 \begin_layout Subsection
30332 The Bibliography Environment
30333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30335 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30342 \begin_layout Standard
30347 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30349 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30358 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30360 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30361 of ASCII characters only.
30365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30370 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30376 \begin_inset Newline newline
30380 \begin_inset Flex URL
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30385 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30395 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30405 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30406 \begin_inset Newline newline
30413 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30414 the number of the entry.
30419 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30434 or the toolbar button
30437 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30441 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30442 containing the available citations.
30443 Select one or more keys from the list and
30453 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30454 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30458 \begin_layout Standard
30459 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30460 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30461 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30473 \begin_layout Standard
30477 Companion Second Edition
30480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30482 key "latexcompanion"
30490 \begin_layout Standard
30491 The \SpecialChar LyX
30492 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30511 \begin_inset Index idx
30514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30523 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30524 the label needs to be given the form
30525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30536 Author A and Author B(Year)
30537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30544 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30551 \begin_inset space ~
30556 in the document settings
30557 \begin_inset Index idx
30560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 Document ! Settings
30568 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30570 \begin_inset space ~
30576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30578 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30586 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30588 Once you have done that, the
30592 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30609 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30610 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30611 These two are madatory.
30612 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30615 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30617 ) and in abrreviated form (
30624 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30625 add the abbreviated form to
30629 and the full list to the optional
30637 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30638 If specified like this,
30640 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30641 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30651 is specified, toggling
30652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30659 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30660 full and abbreviated list
30664 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30665 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30666 the citation references.
30667 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30673 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30678 \begin_inset space ~
30686 arg "layout-paragraph"
30690 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30693 \begin_layout Subsection
30694 Bibliography databases
30695 \begin_inset Index idx
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30699 Bibliography ! Databases
30705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30707 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30714 \begin_layout Standard
30715 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30721 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30723 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30724 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30729 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30731 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30732 your working field in a database.
30733 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30734 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30735 list for that document.
30736 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 The database is a text file with the file extension
30742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30753 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30754 The format is explained in
30755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30762 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30766 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30772 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30773 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30774 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30776 \begin_inset Flex URL
30779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30781 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30789 \begin_layout Standard
30791 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30792 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30793 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30795 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30797 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30798 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30799 Those are addressed by
30804 \begin_inset Index idx
30807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 packages ! biblatex
30815 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30816 (although it has been significantly
30817 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30828 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30829 might conversely fail to correctly
30830 handle databases that use specific
30839 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30843 \begin_layout Standard
30844 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30849 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30855 \begin_inset Index idx
30858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 Document ! Settings
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30876 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30885 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30887 \begin_inset Index idx
30890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30900 \begin_layout Standard
30901 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30905 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30913 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30914 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30922 Add bibliography to TOC
30924 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30929 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30930 in the document or just the cited references.
30932 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30937 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30938 differ from the encoding of the document.
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30944 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30945 style file is a text file with the file extension
30946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30957 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30958 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30959 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30960 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30962 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30968 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30969 \begin_inset Newline newline
30973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30975 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30985 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30990 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30994 \begin_layout Standard
30995 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31000 \begin_inset Index idx
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31010 \begin_inset Index idx
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 packages ! biblatex
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 Accessing a database via
31028 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31032 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31034 \begin_inset space ~
31040 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31041 you cannot select a
31046 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31050 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31053 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31054 As for the styles, note the following.
31059 \begin_layout Standard
31064 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31077 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31078 file (text file with the file extension
31079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31090 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31091 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31093 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31102 styles are not set in the
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31110 dialog, but in the document settings.
31111 \begin_inset Index idx
31114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 Document ! Settings
31120 However, in the dialog in the
31124 field, which is only visible if you use
31128 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31129 example how its heading will appear).
31130 These options are described in detail in the
31135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31147 \begin_inset space ~
31151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31153 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31164 Bibliography Processors
31167 \begin_layout Standard
31168 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31169 uses a bibliography processor,
31170 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31171 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31172 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31174 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31175 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31178 \begin_layout Standard
31179 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31181 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31182 You can do this on a general level in
31184 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31185 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31186 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31189 or for individual documents in
31191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31192 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31196 The following variants are available by default:
31199 \begin_layout Description
31200 biber a specific, modern processor
31201 \begin_inset Index idx
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 developed exclusively for
31215 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31221 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31226 makes use of; if you use the
31230 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31237 \begin_layout Description
31238 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31239 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31240 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31244 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31247 \begin_layout Description
31248 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31249 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31253 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31257 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31261 features are supported.
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 By default (with the
31271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31287 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31290 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31291 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31304 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31305 -based bibliography styles).
31306 This should suit most needs.
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31310 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31311 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31312 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31317 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31318 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31319 You can adjust it in
31321 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31322 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31323 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31329 \begin_layout Standard
31330 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31331 can add below the selection.
31332 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31333 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31353 \begin_layout Standard
31355 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31357 These are explained in detail in section
31359 Customizing Bibliographies
31363 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31368 Additional Features
31373 \begin_layout Subsection
31375 \begin_inset Index idx
31378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31379 Bibliography ! Citation format
31385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31387 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31395 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31400 \begin_inset space \space{}
31403 numerical citation (as
31404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31411 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31419 ) or author-year citations (as
31420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31429 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31433 \begin_layout Standard
31434 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31442 \begin_inset Index idx
31445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31446 Document ! Settings
31451 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31457 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31458 labels, is there to use
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31477 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31480 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 With a bibliography database (see
31489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31491 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31498 ) one has in contrary to the
31502 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31503 These style formats are available:
31506 \begin_layout Description
31508 \begin_inset space ~
31511 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31512 -based approached without any additional packages
31513 (simple numeric citations).
31516 \begin_layout Description
31517 Biblatex loads the package
31522 \begin_inset Index idx
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31527 packages ! biblatex
31532 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31534 Biblatex citation style
31538 Biblatex bibliography style
31541 Options to the package
31545 can be entered in the
31552 \begin_layout Description
31554 \begin_inset space ~
31558 \begin_inset space ~
31561 mode) loads the package
31565 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31566 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31578 behavior very closely.
31583 this option has some additional styles.
31588 styles are also supported by this variant.
31591 \begin_layout Description
31593 \begin_inset space ~
31596 (BibTeX) loads the package
31601 \begin_inset Index idx
31604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31611 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31614 \begin_layout Description
31616 \begin_inset space ~
31619 (BibTeX) loads the package
31624 \begin_inset Index idx
31627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31634 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31637 \begin_layout Standard
31646 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31648 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31657 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31659 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31660 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31662 Biblatex citation style
31665 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31671 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31677 are available in the
31682 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31683 a name prefix such as
31684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31699 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31704 \begin_inset space \space{}
31708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31719 \begin_layout Standard
31720 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31726 \begin_inset space \space{}
31729 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31735 \begin_inset space \space{}
31739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31751 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31755 \begin_inset space ~
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31769 Here is a simple example where the text
31770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31774 \begin_inset space ~
31778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31781 appears after the reference:
31784 \begin_layout Quote
31786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31789 key "latexcompanion"
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 All styles except for
31802 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31812 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31816 \begin_layout Standard
31817 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31818 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31819 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31824 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31825 multi-citation (so-called
31826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31829 qualified citation lists
31830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31836 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31841 dialog will display three columns in the field
31848 \begin_inset space ~
31856 \begin_inset space ~
31864 \begin_inset space ~
31870 If you double-click on an item's
31873 \begin_inset space ~
31881 \begin_inset space ~
31886 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31889 General text before
31895 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31898 \begin_layout Section
31900 \begin_inset Index idx
31903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31919 \begin_layout Standard
31920 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31924 \begin_inset space ~
31929 or the toolbar button
31936 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31937 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31938 by \SpecialChar LyX
31939 as the index entry.
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31946 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31948 \begin_inset space ~
31954 A light blue box labeled
31955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31966 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31967 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31973 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31974 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31975 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31979 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31987 \begin_layout Subsection
31988 Grouping Index Entries
31989 \begin_inset Index idx
31992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32004 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32005 lists under the entry
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32014 First we create the entry
32015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32023 \begin_inset space ~
32027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32029 reference "subsec:Lists"
32034 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32035 \begin_inset space ~
32039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32041 reference "sec:Itemize"
32045 , we insert the command
32048 \begin_layout Standard
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32065 for the enumerated list in section
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32072 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 The exclamation mark
32081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32088 marks the grouping levels.
32089 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32090 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32091 If we don't have an index entry for
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32099 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32102 \begin_layout Subsection
32104 \begin_inset Index idx
32107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32108 Index ! Page ranges
32116 \begin_layout Standard
32117 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32119 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32120 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32121 an index entry in section
32122 \begin_inset space ~
32126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32128 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32135 \begin_layout Standard
32138 Paragraph environments|(
32141 \begin_layout Standard
32142 and another entry at the end of section
32143 \begin_inset space ~
32147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32149 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32156 \begin_layout Standard
32159 Paragraph environments|)
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32187 respectively start and end the index range.
32188 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32189 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32190 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32191 An example is the index entry
32192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32195 Document ! Settings
32196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32202 \begin_layout Subsection
32204 \begin_inset Index idx
32207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32208 Index ! Cross referencing
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32217 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32218 We referred for example in the index entry
32219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32227 \begin_inset space ~
32231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32233 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32237 ) to the index entry
32238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32245 in the same section using the entry
32248 \begin_layout Standard
32251 GIF|see{Image formats}
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32257 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32258 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32261 \begin_layout Subsection
32263 \begin_inset Index idx
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32267 Index ! Entry order
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32276 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32277 follow the rules for the index order.
32278 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32284 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32286 \begin_inset space ~
32290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32292 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32301 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32302 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32327 \begin_inset Index idx
32330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32331 Dummy entries ! maïs
32337 \begin_inset Index idx
32340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32341 Dummy entries ! maître
32347 \begin_inset Index idx
32350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32351 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32356 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32357 maïs, maison, maître.
32358 To achieve this, we use the command
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32364 previous entry@current entry
32367 \begin_layout Standard
32368 In our case we want to have
32369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32384 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32395 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32397 See the next subsection for an example.
32400 \begin_layout Subsection
32402 \begin_inset Index idx
32405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32406 Index ! Entry layout
32414 \begin_layout Standard
32415 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32416 \begin_inset Index idx
32419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32422 This is an italic dummy entry
32427 You can also format the page number using the character
32428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32435 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32436 -command without a backslash.
32437 We can write for example
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32443 italic page number:|textit
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32447 to get the page number in italic.
32448 \begin_inset Index idx
32451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32452 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32457 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32458 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32476 \begin_inset space ~
32482 Have a look at section
32483 \begin_inset space ~
32487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32489 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32493 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32506 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32510 to generate the index, see section
32511 \begin_inset space ~
32515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32517 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32526 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32531 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32535 key "latexcompanion"
32548 \begin_layout Standard
32549 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32551 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32552 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32553 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32554 If so, put the following in the preamble
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32569 \begin_layout Standard
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32579 \begin_layout Standard
32580 in the index entry.
32581 \begin_inset Index idx
32584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32585 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32590 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32591 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32592 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32597 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32598 a bold font for all index entries.
32599 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32611 documentation for details,
32612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32614 key "makeindex,xindy"
32622 \begin_layout Subsection
32624 \begin_inset Index idx
32627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32636 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32643 \begin_layout Standard
32644 If the index generation program
32648 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32649 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32653 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32654 distribution, is used.
32658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32663 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32664 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32665 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32666 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32667 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32677 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32679 dialog, see section
32680 \begin_inset space ~
32684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32686 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32691 The available options are listed and explained in
32692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32694 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32700 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32704 \begin_layout Standard
32705 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32706 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32714 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32715 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32718 \begin_layout Subsection
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32723 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32724 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32732 next to the standard index.
32734 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32735 that add this feature.
32742 \begin_inset Index idx
32745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32747 packages ! splitidx
32752 package to generate multiple indexes.
32753 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32759 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32769 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32770 style, but it also includes
32771 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32772 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32780 \begin_layout Standard
32781 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32782 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32788 and select the option
32790 Use multiple Indexes
32797 already contains the standard index
32798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32806 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32807 also appear as a heading) to the
32811 input field and press the
32816 The new index now also appears in the list.
32817 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32818 label color to the new index.
32821 \begin_layout Standard
32822 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32826 List/Contents/References
32832 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32833 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32834 are additional features:
32837 \begin_layout Itemize
32838 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32839 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32842 \begin_layout Itemize
32843 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32844 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32849 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32850 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32851 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32852 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32855 \begin_layout Itemize
32860 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32861 code in the name of the index.
32864 \begin_layout Section
32865 Nomenclature/Glossary
32866 \begin_inset Index idx
32869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32876 \begin_inset Index idx
32879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32910 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32918 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32919 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32920 called nomenclature or glossary.
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32924 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32931 \begin_inset Index idx
32934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32942 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32951 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32955 \begin_layout Standard
32956 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32957 and then use the menu
32959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32970 or the toolbar button
32973 arg "nomencl-insert"
32978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32989 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32992 \begin_layout Standard
32993 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32994 The first is the term or
32998 that you wish to define.
33003 of the term or symbol.
33006 \begin_layout Standard
33007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33015 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33016 code for nomenclature entries the option
33020 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33028 \begin_layout Subsection
33029 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33030 \begin_inset Index idx
33033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 Nomenclature ! Layout
33042 \begin_layout Standard
33043 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33047 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33054 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33062 \begin_inset Newline newline
33070 \begin_inset Newline newline
33076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33083 character starts/ends the formula.
33084 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33085 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33097 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 syntax is given in section
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33116 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33123 \begin_layout Standard
33127 \begin_inset space ~
33132 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33134 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33139 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33146 in this document is:
33147 \begin_inset Newline newline
33152 dummy entry for the character
33157 \begin_inset Newline newline
33169 \begin_inset space ~
33179 font use the command
33208 \begin_layout Standard
33209 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33214 \begin_inset space \space{}
33218 \begin_inset Newline newline
33234 \begin_inset Newline newline
33237 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33238 This command will make the font of all symbols
33245 \begin_inset space ~
33253 \begin_layout Standard
33254 If the characters |
33255 \begin_inset space \space{}
33259 \begin_inset space \space{}
33263 \begin_inset space \space{}
33267 \begin_inset space \space{}
33271 \begin_inset space \space{}
33274 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33275 code they need to be escaped
33276 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33277 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33278 LatexCommand nomenclature
33279 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33280 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33288 \begin_layout Subsection
33289 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33290 \begin_inset Index idx
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33302 \begin_layout Standard
33303 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33304 -code of the symbol
33306 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33308 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33311 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33312 LatexCommand nomenclature
33314 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33322 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33326 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33327 LatexCommand nomenclature
33330 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33336 They will be sorted by
33337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33363 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33366 will be sorted before the
33370 since the character
33371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33378 is considered in sorting.
33381 \begin_layout Standard
33382 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33390 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33391 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33393 For the example given, you can insert
33397 in this field for the
33398 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33405 will be located before
33406 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33412 \begin_layout Standard
33413 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33428 \begin_layout Subsection
33429 Nomenclature Options
33430 \begin_inset Index idx
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 Nomenclature ! Options
33440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33442 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33454 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33455 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33458 \begin_layout Description
33459 refeq Appends the phrase
33460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33475 to every nomenclature entry, where
33481 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33484 \begin_layout Description
33485 refpage Appends the phrase
33486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33501 to every nomenclature entry, where
33507 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33510 \begin_layout Description
33511 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33514 \begin_layout Standard
33515 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33516 class options list in the
33518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33522 In this document the options
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33537 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33538 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33543 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33546 \begin_layout Description
33556 \begin_layout Description
33559 nomrefpage Like the
33566 \begin_layout Description
33569 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33578 \begin_layout Description
33582 \begin_inset space ~
33588 \begin_inset space ~
33593 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33596 \begin_layout Standard
33598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33605 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33606 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33610 \begin_layout Standard
33619 \begin_inset Newline newline
33625 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33629 \begin_inset space ~
33641 unskip, see equation
33644 \begin_inset Newline newline
33651 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33652 \begin_inset Newline newline
33658 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33662 \begin_inset space ~
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33688 in the document settings under
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33699 \begin_layout Standard
33707 \begin_inset Newline newline
33711 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 \begin_inset space ~
33727 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33729 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33730 \begin_inset Newline newline
33737 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33738 \begin_inset Newline newline
33742 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33746 \begin_inset space ~
33758 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33763 \begin_layout Subsection
33764 Printing the Nomenclature
33765 \begin_inset Index idx
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 Nomenclature ! Printing
33777 \begin_layout Standard
33778 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33781 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33797 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33798 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33799 You can choose between these settings:
33802 \begin_layout Description
33803 Default a space of 1
33804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33810 \begin_layout Description
33812 \begin_inset space ~
33816 \begin_inset space ~
33819 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33822 \begin_layout Description
33823 Custom custom space
33826 \begin_layout Standard
33827 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33836 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33844 For example, in order to change the name to
33848 , add the following line to the preamble:
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33864 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33869 \begin_inset Newline newline
33884 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33887 \begin_layout Subsection
33888 Nomenclature Program
33889 \begin_inset Index idx
33892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33893 Nomenclature ! Program
33899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33901 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33908 \begin_layout Standard
33914 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33915 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33917 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33922 by adding options, see section
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33929 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33934 The available options are listed and explained in
33935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33937 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33945 \begin_layout Section
33947 \begin_inset Index idx
33950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33957 \begin_inset Index idx
33960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33961 Document ! Branches
33967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33969 name "sec:Branches"
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33977 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33978 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33979 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33980 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33983 \begin_layout Standard
33984 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33985 allows you to put text into branches.
33986 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33987 To create a branch, either select the menu
33989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33990 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33993 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34002 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34003 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34004 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34005 and whether the name of the branch should
34006 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34007 (see below for an example).
34008 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34009 to the name of the other) and to add
34010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34022 \begin_inset space ~
34025 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34026 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34029 \begin_layout Standard
34030 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34031 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34036 where you can choose a branch.
34037 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34041 \begin_layout Standard
34042 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34043 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 \begin_inset Branch Question
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34056 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34064 \begin_layout Standard
34065 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34069 \begin_layout Standard
34074 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34082 \begin_layout Standard
34089 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34090 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34093 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34094 Consider for example a file
34095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34102 which has the above branches.
34104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34111 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34135 branch were inactive,
34136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34151 branch was active, likewise
34152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34167 branch was active, and
34168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34171 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34175 if both branches were active.
34176 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34177 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34190 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34191 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_layout Standard
34204 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34221 branch is deactivated.
34227 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34233 \begin_layout Standard
34234 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34235 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34236 definitions for each branch.
34237 For example you can define for the question branch
34241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34242 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34243 -syntax, see section
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34250 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34283 and for the answer branch
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34307 \begin_inset Branch Question
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34381 Now it is possible to use the
34385 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34392 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34395 commands to obtain conditional output.
34396 Here is an example formula where only the
34403 \begin_inset Formula
34405 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34414 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34429 \begin_inset space \space{}
34432 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34434 For this advanced usage, see the
34440 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34445 \begin_layout Section
34447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34449 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34454 \begin_inset Index idx
34457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34473 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34475 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 \begin_inset Index idx
34484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34486 packages ! hyperref
34491 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34492 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34493 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34494 part of the document.
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 The header information in the dialog tab
34503 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34504 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34505 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34506 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34510 \begin_inset space ~
34514 \begin_inset space ~
34519 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34520 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34521 and author entries.
34525 \begin_inset space ~
34529 \begin_inset space ~
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34538 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 You can specify in the dialog tab
34546 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34551 \begin_inset space ~
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34559 \begin_inset space ~
34564 option allows long links to be split;
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34583 \begin_inset space ~
34588 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34596 colors the different links.
34597 The default colors are:
34600 \begin_layout Labeling
34601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34606 for hyperlinks and URLs
34609 \begin_layout Labeling
34610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34618 \begin_layout Labeling
34619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34627 \begin_layout Standard
34628 but you can change these in the field
34633 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34636 \begin_layout Standard
34639 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34647 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34648 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34649 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34657 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34658 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34659 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34669 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34670 when opening the PDF.
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34675 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34679 1 will only display the sections.
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34684 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34690 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34691 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34701 \begin_layout Section
34703 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34707 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34714 \begin_layout Subsection
34717 \begin_inset Index idx
34720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34730 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34738 As \SpecialChar LyX
34739 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34740 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34741 commands and constructs,
34744 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34745 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34746 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34747 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34748 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34749 cannot support all packages and
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34755 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34756 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34760 Code box is created by the menu
34762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34764 \begin_inset space ~
34769 or by the toolbar button
34782 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34790 \begin_layout Standard
34791 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34793 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34795 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34805 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34812 , you can write the command part
34818 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34819 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34823 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34824 Code box behind the word.
34825 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34826 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34830 \begin_layout Standard
34831 \begin_inset Graphics
34832 filename clipart/ERT.png
34840 \begin_layout Standard
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 This is a line with a
34849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34881 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34882 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34883 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34884 know that the command is finished.
34892 \begin_layout Subsection
34893 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34895 \begin_inset Argument 1
34898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34899 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34906 \begin_inset Index idx
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34919 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34926 \begin_layout Standard
34927 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34928 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34929 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34930 uses in the background.
34931 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34932 is based on commands, you can
34933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34941 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34942 any time if you know the right commands.
34943 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34944 is the end of the day.
34945 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34946 all caption labels bold.
34947 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34949 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34954 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34956 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34958 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 As result you find that the package
34977 \begin_inset Index idx
34980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34988 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34993 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34997 \begin_inset space ~
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35010 usepackage[options]{package name}
35013 \begin_layout Standard
35014 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35015 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35016 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35017 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35020 \begin_layout Standard
35021 In your case the package name is
35026 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35031 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35032 So you add the command
35035 \begin_layout Standard
35040 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35044 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35049 For more commands provided by the
35053 package, have a look at its documentation,
35054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35072 For example if you use a
35076 class, you don't need the package
35080 , you can instead write
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35088 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35095 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35096 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35103 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35106 \begin_layout Standard
35107 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35108 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35110 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35111 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35112 Code box as described in the previous
35116 \begin_layout Standard
35117 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35118 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35121 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35123 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35131 \begin_layout Standard
35132 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35152 \begin_inset Note Note
35155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35164 \begin_layout Left Header
35165 \begin_inset Argument 1
35168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35188 \begin_inset Note Note
35191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 defines the header line as described below
35200 \begin_layout Center Header
35201 \begin_inset Argument 1
35204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35213 \begin_layout Right Header
35214 \begin_inset Argument 1
35217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35238 \begin_layout Left Footer
35239 \begin_inset Argument 1
35242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 \begin_layout Center Footer
35264 \begin_inset Argument 1
35267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35279 \begin_inset Newline newline
35283 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35289 \begin_layout Right Footer
35290 \begin_inset Argument 1
35293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35315 \begin_layout Section
35316 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35319 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35324 \begin_inset Index idx
35327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35328 Document ! Header/Footer line
35334 \begin_inset Index idx
35337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35346 \begin_layout Standard
35347 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35374 As a second step add in the menu
35376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35377 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35386 Custom Header/Footerlines
35389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35393 This module offers the following 6
35394 \begin_inset space ~
35400 \begin_layout Description
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_inset space ~
35418 \begin_inset space ~
35424 \begin_layout Description
35426 \begin_inset space ~
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35438 \begin_inset space ~
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35448 \begin_layout Standard
35449 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35450 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35453 \begin_layout Standard
35454 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35455 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35463 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35467 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 \begin_inset Float figure
35478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 \begin_inset Tabular
35482 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35483 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35484 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35485 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35486 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35506 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35535 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35546 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35550 The normal text on the page goes here.
35551 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35553 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35554 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35559 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35568 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35579 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35597 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35649 name "fig:Page-layout"
35653 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35667 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35675 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35684 is set to “Default”.
35685 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35694 \begin_layout Subsection
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35700 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35701 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35702 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35704 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35706 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35709 \begin_layout Standard
35710 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35711 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_layout Description
35728 thepage prints the current page number
35731 \begin_layout Description
35734 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35737 \begin_layout Description
35740 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35743 \begin_layout Description
35746 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35747 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35754 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35757 because it usually goes in a left header.
35760 \begin_layout Description
35763 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35764 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35766 It is normally used in the right header.
35769 \begin_layout Subsection
35770 Default header/footer
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35774 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35775 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35776 footer has the page number.
35777 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35778 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35779 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35790 \begin_layout Subsection
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35796 Some pages are different.
35797 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35798 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35799 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35800 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35801 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35805 Header and footer decoration line
35808 \begin_layout Standard
35809 By default, you get a 0.4
35810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35813 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35814 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35826 in the following way:
35829 \begin_layout Standard
35836 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35839 \begin_layout Standard
35840 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35853 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35863 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35879 Several header/footer lines
35882 \begin_layout Standard
35883 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35884 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35885 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35887 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35920 headheight}{height}
35923 \begin_layout Standard
35928 is a size in standard units (e.
35929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35933 \begin_inset space \space{}
35941 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35942 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35943 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35944 logfile with the menu
35946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35961 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35966 \begin_inset Index idx
35969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 packages ! fancyhdr
35977 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35978 for your header/footer.
35981 \begin_layout Subsection
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35987 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35988 This example consists of the following definition:
35991 \begin_layout Description
35993 \begin_inset space ~
36002 , empty optional argument
36005 \begin_layout Description
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36010 Header empty, empty optional argument
36013 \begin_layout Description
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36024 in the optional argument
36027 \begin_layout Description
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36038 in the optional argument
36041 \begin_layout Description
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36060 \begin_inset Newline newline
36064 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36071 in the optional argument
36074 \begin_layout Description
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36085 , empty optional argument
36088 \begin_layout Description
36091 headrulewidth set to 2
36092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36098 \begin_layout Standard
36099 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36100 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36116 \begin_layout Standard
36117 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36123 \begin_layout Standard
36127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36131 pagestyle{headings}
36137 \begin_inset Note Note
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 switches back to page style with the default headings
36149 \begin_layout Section
36150 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36153 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36158 \begin_inset Index idx
36161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 \begin_inset Index idx
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36182 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36183 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36184 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36187 \begin_layout Subsection
36191 \begin_layout Standard
36192 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36198 \begin_inset Index idx
36201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36203 packages ! preview-latex
36208 (on some systems named simply
36213 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36215 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36222 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36224 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36232 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36233 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36234 -package are automatically
36235 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36239 \begin_layout Subsection
36243 \begin_layout Standard
36244 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36245 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36247 activate the option
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36257 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset space ~
36270 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36277 \begin_inset space ~
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36295 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36299 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36322 and when you finish
36326 \begin_layout Standard
36327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36336 generated by activating the option
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36345 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36353 \begin_layout Subsection
36354 Selected document parts
36357 \begin_layout Standard
36358 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36359 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36360 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36361 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36363 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36369 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36370 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36371 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36374 \begin_layout Standard
36375 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36382 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36394 is explained in section
36396 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36411 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36412 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36413 the final rotated boxes,
36414 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36415 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36417 Here is the result:
36420 \begin_layout Standard
36421 \begin_inset Preview
36423 \begin_layout Standard
36428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36432 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36438 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36448 height_special "totalheight"
36453 backgroundcolor "none"
36456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36481 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36487 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36509 \begin_layout Standard
36510 Previewing works also for colors.
36511 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36530 is explained in section
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_layout Standard
36551 \begin_inset Preview
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36576 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36581 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36607 \begin_layout Standard
36608 If \SpecialChar LyX
36609 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36610 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36611 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36612 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36613 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36614 the \SpecialChar TeX
36616 If \SpecialChar LyX
36617 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36618 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36620 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36621 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36622 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36625 \begin_layout Subsection
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36632 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36635 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36642 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36644 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36646 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36647 's main window, then only this selection
36648 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36649 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36650 the source view window.
36655 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36656 ; but note that if you have
36657 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36659 not just the one which is open at the time.
36662 \begin_layout Section
36663 Advanced Find and Replace
36664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36666 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36671 \begin_inset Index idx
36674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36681 \begin_inset Index idx
36684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36699 allows for searching of complex,
36700 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36702 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36703 The key-features are:
36706 \begin_layout Itemize
36707 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36708 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36709 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36713 \begin_layout Itemize
36714 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36715 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36716 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36717 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36720 \begin_layout Itemize
36721 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36722 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36723 outside of mathematics environments
36726 \begin_layout Itemize
36727 Search may be widened to a specific
36732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36739 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36740 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36747 \begin_layout Itemize
36748 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36749 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36757 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36760 \begin_layout Subsection
36764 \begin_layout Standard
36765 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36767 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36780 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36783 ) or the toolbar button
36786 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36792 Advanced Find and Replace
36797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36807 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36816 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36819 arg "paragraph-break"
36823 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36824 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36828 arg "paragraph-break"
36831 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36835 searches backwards.
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36847 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36861 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36865 Searching for mathematics
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36869 Mathematical formulas, such as
36870 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36873 or something more complex like
36874 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36877 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36882 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36883 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36884 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36885 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36895 \begin_layout Standard
36896 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36897 This is done by switching to the
36901 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36906 This way, entering in the
36913 \begin_layout Itemize
36914 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36915 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36918 \begin_layout Itemize
36919 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36920 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36923 \begin_layout Itemize
36924 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36925 of it only within section headings.
36926 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36927 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36931 \begin_layout Itemize
36932 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36933 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36941 The entries made in the
36945 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36954 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36958 button or alternatively press
36961 arg "paragraph-break"
36968 while the cursor is in the
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_layout Standard
36980 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36982 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36986 \begin_layout Itemize
36987 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36988 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36996 with its typewriter version
36997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37011 \begin_layout Itemize
37012 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37018 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37030 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37037 (you may want to enable the
37040 \begin_inset space ~
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37053 options and disable the
37061 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37069 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37070 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37074 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37077 , or occurrences of
37078 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37082 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37088 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37098 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37102 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37112 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37118 This is done with the context menu
37120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37121 Insert Regular Expression
37123 while the cursor is in the
37128 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37129 expression matching rules
37133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37134 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37144 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37145 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37151 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37152 same text in the document.
37153 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37154 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37157 \begin_layout Enumerate
37158 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37163 editor the fraction
37164 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37168 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37171 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37172 fractions with the given denominator.
37175 \begin_layout Enumerate
37176 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37188 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37193 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37194 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37195 Also, by inserting a
37196 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37199 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37200 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37203 \begin_layout Standard
37204 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37205 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37206 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37209 , and referring back to them through
37210 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37214 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37218 For example, try searching with the regexp
37219 \begin_inset Newline newline
37222 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37225 \begin_inset Newline newline
37228 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37232 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37235 \begin_layout Standard
37236 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37244 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37245 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37246 sub-expressions is absolute.
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37255 always refers to the first occurrence of
37256 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37259 in all entered regexps.
37267 \begin_layout Section
37269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37271 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37276 \begin_inset Index idx
37279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37290 has a built-in spell checker.
37293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37300 key or the toolbar button
37303 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37306 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37307 beginning of the currently selected text.
37308 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37309 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37310 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37311 scrolled so that it is visible.
37312 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37313 n, if any could be found.
37314 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37318 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37319 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37323 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37330 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37331 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37333 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37334 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37345 arg "dialog-show character"
37348 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37350 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37354 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37355 can be downloaded from here:
37356 \begin_inset Newline newline
37360 \begin_inset Flex URL
37363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37365 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37371 \begin_inset Newline newline
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37378 files for each language.
37379 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37383 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37384 's installation subfolder
37392 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37394 \begin_inset Newline newline
37397 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37398 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37399 but in most cases these are
37415 is the language code.
37418 \begin_layout Subsection
37422 \begin_layout Standard
37425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37426 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37431 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37434 you can set the following things:
37437 \begin_layout Description
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37442 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37443 should use for spell checking.
37444 Depending on your platform,
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37455 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37456 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37474 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37477 \begin_layout Description
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37482 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37483 will always use the given language
37484 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37487 \begin_layout Description
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37492 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37498 \begin_inset space \space{}
37502 This should normally not be needed.
37505 \begin_layout Description
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37514 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37526 \begin_layout Description
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37531 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37532 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37533 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37534 appear in a context menu.
37535 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37539 \begin_layout Description
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37552 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37556 \begin_layout Section
37558 \begin_inset Index idx
37561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37570 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37577 \begin_layout Standard
37579 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37580 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37592 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37602 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37604 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37605 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37606 which are available for many languages.
37609 \begin_layout Standard
37610 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37611 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37615 \begin_layout Subsection
37616 Setting up the thesaurus
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37628 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37632 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37637 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37651 For instance, the US English files are named:
37654 \begin_layout Itemize
37658 \begin_layout Itemize
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37671 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37672 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37675 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37677 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37684 ) to the path where they are installed.
37688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37689 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37690 ies, typical locations are
37696 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37700 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37704 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37707 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37713 LibreOffice-<Version>
37720 On the Mac, the default location is
37722 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37723 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37724 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37725 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37726 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37727 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37735 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37736 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37737 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37741 \begin_layout Standard
37742 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37743 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37745 \begin_inset Newline newline
37749 \begin_inset Flex URL
37752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37754 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37763 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37764 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37766 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37767 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37768 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37775 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37777 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37778 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37782 \begin_layout Standard
37783 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37785 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37788 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37794 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37797 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37798 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37806 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37807 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37808 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37810 \begin_inset space ~
37815 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37818 \begin_layout Subsection
37819 Using the thesaurus
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37828 or the toolbar button
37831 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37834 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37836 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37838 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37839 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37840 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37849 ), related terms (such as
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37861 ), compounds (such as
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37873 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37882 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37887 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37893 the dictionary, such as the above
37897 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37902 \begin_inset space \space{}
37905 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37906 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37907 For example, looking up the word form
37911 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37916 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37921 \begin_inset space \space{}
37932 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37933 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37934 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37937 \begin_layout Section
37939 \begin_inset Index idx
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37949 \begin_inset Index idx
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37953 Document ! Change Tracking
37959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37961 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37970 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37971 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37972 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37976 \begin_inset space ~
37979 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37989 \begin_layout Standard
37990 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38004 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38005 You can change the color in
38007 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38008 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38025 \begin_inset Index idx
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38029 Color ! Change tracking
38034 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38035 's status bar when the
38036 cursor is in changed text.
38037 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38040 arg "changes-merge"
38046 \begin_layout Standard
38047 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38049 \begin_inset Index idx
38052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38068 \begin_layout Standard
38069 \begin_inset Graphics
38070 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38089 \begin_layout Standard
38090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38096 \begin_layout Standard
38097 \begin_inset Tabular
38098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38099 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38101 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38111 arg "changes-track"
38119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38130 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38150 arg "changes-output"
38158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38166 \begin_inset space ~
38169 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38171 \begin_inset space ~
38175 \begin_inset space ~
38179 \begin_inset space ~
38188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38209 Jumps to the next change
38215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 arg "change-accept"
38232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38240 \begin_inset space ~
38243 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38245 \begin_inset space ~
38254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38263 arg "change-reject"
38271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38277 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38282 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38293 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 arg "changes-merge"
38310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38321 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38341 arg "all-changes-accept"
38349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38360 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38366 \begin_inset space ~
38375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38384 arg "all-changes-reject"
38392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38403 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38442 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38444 \begin_inset space ~
38453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38476 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38494 \begin_layout Standard
38495 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38501 \begin_layout Standard
38502 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38522 \begin_layout Standard
38523 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38524 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38525 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38526 the next change after the current cursor position.
38527 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38528 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38529 step to the next change.
38530 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38534 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38535 to describe a change.
38538 \begin_layout Standard
38540 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38541 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38547 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38558 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38567 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38573 \begin_layout Section
38574 Comparison of Documents
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38577 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38582 \begin_inset Index idx
38585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38586 Comparison of documents
38594 \begin_layout Standard
38595 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38598 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38602 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38603 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38605 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38607 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38611 \begin_inset space ~
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38619 \begin_inset space ~
38628 \begin_inset space ~
38632 \begin_inset space ~
38636 \begin_inset space ~
38640 \begin_inset space ~
38644 \begin_inset space ~
38648 \begin_inset space ~
38653 enables the change tracking option
38656 \begin_inset space ~
38660 \begin_inset space ~
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38669 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38672 \begin_layout Section
38673 International Support
38674 \begin_inset Index idx
38677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38678 International support
38686 \begin_layout Standard
38687 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38688 with any language you want.
38689 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38690 up \SpecialChar LyX
38692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38694 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38702 \begin_layout Standard
38703 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38704 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38705 \begin_inset space ~
38709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38711 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38718 \begin_layout Subsection
38720 \begin_inset Index idx
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 \begin_inset Index idx
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 Document ! Settings
38740 \begin_inset Index idx
38743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38744 Document ! Language
38752 \begin_layout Standard
38755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 dialog lets you set
38761 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38766 \begin_layout Standard
38771 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38776 \begin_inset space ~
38781 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38782 For details about the different encoding options see section
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38789 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38796 \begin_layout Subsection
38797 Keyboard mapping configuration
38798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38800 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38807 \begin_layout Standard
38808 If you have for example a U.
38809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38812 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38813 can use an alternate keymap.
38814 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38820 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38824 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38831 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38836 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38837 which one you want to use.
38840 \begin_layout Standard
38841 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38842 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38843 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38847 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38848 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38849 one to support the characters you want.
38850 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38857 \begin_layout Chapter
38860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38862 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38869 \begin_layout Standard
38870 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38871 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38872 topic inside the user's guide.
38875 \begin_layout Section
38877 \begin_inset Index idx
38880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38889 \begin_layout Standard
38894 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38897 \begin_layout Subsection
38901 \begin_layout Standard
38902 Creates a new document.
38905 \begin_layout Subsection
38909 \begin_layout Standard
38910 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38911 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38912 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38914 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38915 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38921 \begin_layout Subsection
38925 \begin_layout Standard
38929 \begin_layout Subsection
38933 \begin_layout Standard
38934 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38935 Click there on a file to open it.
38938 \begin_layout Subsection
38940 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38944 \begin_layout Standard
38946 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38947 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38951 \begin_layout Subsection
38955 \begin_layout Standard
38956 Closes the current document.
38959 \begin_layout Subsection
38963 \begin_layout Standard
38964 Closes all opened documents.
38967 \begin_layout Subsection
38971 \begin_layout Standard
38972 Saves the actual document.
38975 \begin_layout Subsection
38979 \begin_layout Standard
38980 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38981 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38985 \begin_layout Subsection
38987 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38991 \begin_layout Standard
38993 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38994 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39000 \begin_layout Subsection
39004 \begin_layout Standard
39005 Saves all opened documents.
39008 \begin_layout Subsection
39012 \begin_layout Standard
39013 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39016 \begin_layout Subsection
39020 \begin_layout Standard
39021 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39022 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39023 It is described in the section
39025 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39030 Additional Features
39035 \begin_layout Subsection
39039 \begin_layout Standard
39040 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39041 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39043 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39044 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39048 \begin_layout Standard
39049 When using the menu entry
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39057 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39074 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39075 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39078 \begin_layout Subsection
39080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39082 name "subsec:Export"
39089 \begin_layout Standard
39090 You can export your document to various file formats.
39091 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39093 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39094 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39095 during its configuration.
39098 \begin_layout Standard
39099 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39107 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39114 \begin_layout Description
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39123 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39128 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39129 \begin_inset Newline newline
39132 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39133 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39137 \begin_layout Description
39138 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39144 \begin_layout Description
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39149 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39155 \begin_layout Description
39156 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39157 's native DVI-format.
39158 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39159 files paths or file names in your document.
39161 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39168 \begin_layout Description
39169 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39170 in files paths or file names
39173 \begin_layout Description
39175 \begin_inset space ~
39182 ) DVI-format using the program
39184 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39187 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39207 \begin_layout Description
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39212 (cropped) the same as
39216 but with cropped page margins.
39219 \begin_layout Description
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39224 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39228 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39233 \begin_layout Description
39237 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39253 \begin_layout Description
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39259 \begin_inset space ~
39262 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39266 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39274 \begin_layout Description
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39287 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39288 source that is compilable with the program
39290 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39294 \begin_layout Description
39298 \begin_inset space ~
39303 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39304 source, additionally all images used in the document
39305 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39309 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39312 \begin_layout Description
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39321 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39322 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39323 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39331 \begin_layout Description
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39344 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39345 source that is compilable with the program
39351 \begin_layout Description
39353 \begin_inset space ~
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39364 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39365 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39371 \begin_layout Description
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39376 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39377 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39383 \begin_inset space \space{}
39388 \begin_inset space ~
39392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39407 represent the version number)
39410 \begin_layout Description
39412 \begin_inset space ~
39416 \begin_inset space ~
39419 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39420 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39421 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39425 \begin_layout Description
39426 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39427 's internal XHTML engine
39430 \begin_layout Description
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset space ~
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39447 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39452 For the conversion the program
39461 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39464 \begin_layout Description
39465 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39470 \begin_layout Description
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39475 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39477 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39480 For the conversion the program
39489 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39492 \begin_layout Description
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39497 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39498 For the conversion the program
39507 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39510 \begin_layout Description
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39515 (cropped) the same as
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39523 but with cropped page margins
39526 \begin_layout Description
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39535 PDF-format using the program
39539 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39542 \begin_layout Description
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39558 \begin_inset space ~
39563 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39568 \begin_inset space \space{}
39571 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39575 \begin_layout Description
39579 \begin_inset space ~
39584 PDF-format using the program
39586 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39589 , produces PDF-files directly
39592 \begin_layout Description
39596 \begin_inset space ~
39601 PDF-format using the program
39605 , produces PDF-files directly
39608 \begin_layout Description
39612 \begin_inset space ~
39617 PDF-format using the program
39621 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39624 \begin_layout Description
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39633 PDF-format using the program
39638 , produces PDF-files directly
39641 \begin_layout Description
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39653 \begin_layout Description
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39666 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39667 and then exported as text using the program
39672 \begin_layout Description
39677 PostScript format using the program
39685 options see section
39686 \begin_inset space ~
39690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39692 reference "subsec:General-output"
39699 \begin_layout Description
39700 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39701 source and also code in the statistical programming
39715 it is possible to use
39719 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39723 \begin_layout Standard
39724 If one of the menu entries
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39740 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39742 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39744 \begin_inset space ~
39748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39750 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39755 \begin_inset Index idx
39758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39759 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39768 \begin_layout Subsection
39772 \begin_layout Standard
39773 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39774 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39777 \begin_inset space ~
39781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39783 reference "sec:Paths"
39788 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39797 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39798 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39799 's preferences as described in section
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39806 reference "subsec:Converters"
39813 \begin_layout Subsection
39814 New and Close Window
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39822 \begin_layout Subsection
39826 \begin_layout Standard
39827 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39830 \begin_layout Section
39832 \begin_inset Index idx
39835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39844 \begin_layout Subsection
39848 \begin_layout Standard
39849 Described in section
39850 \begin_inset space ~
39854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39856 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39863 \begin_layout Subsection
39864 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 Described in section
39869 \begin_inset space ~
39873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39875 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39882 \begin_layout Subsection
39886 \begin_layout Standard
39887 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39888 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39891 \begin_layout Subsection
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39896 Selects the whole document.
39899 \begin_layout Subsection
39900 Find & Replace (Quick)
39903 \begin_layout Standard
39904 Described in section
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39911 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39918 \begin_layout Subsection
39919 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 Described in section
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39930 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39937 \begin_layout Subsection
39938 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39946 \begin_layout Subsection
39948 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39952 \begin_layout Standard
39954 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39955 Described in section
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39962 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39971 \begin_layout Subsection
39973 \begin_inset Index idx
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Paragraph ! Settings
39985 \begin_layout Standard
39986 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39987 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39991 \begin_layout Standard
39992 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39993 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40000 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40012 \begin_layout Subsection
40014 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40021 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40026 \begin_layout Enumerate
40028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40029 Customize text properties by means of the
40035 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40038 ; this is described in section
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40045 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40052 \begin_layout Enumerate
40054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40055 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40057 Apply last settings
40060 \begin_layout Enumerate
40062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40063 Change the casing of selected text (
40078 \begin_layout Subsection
40080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40084 \begin_layout Standard
40086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40087 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40088 text styles (in the case of this document:
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40116 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40125 \begin_layout Subsection
40126 Table and Rows & Columns
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40130 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40131 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40132 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40135 \begin_layout Subsection
40139 \begin_layout Standard
40140 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40141 It will dissolve this inset.
40142 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40146 \begin_layout Subsection
40150 \begin_layout Standard
40151 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40152 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40155 \begin_layout Subsection
40156 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40159 \begin_layout Standard
40160 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40162 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40169 reference "sec:Nesting"
40174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40176 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40183 \begin_layout Section
40185 \begin_inset Index idx
40188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 \begin_layout Standard
40198 At the bottom of the
40202 menu the opened documents are listed.
40205 \begin_layout Subsection
40206 Open/Close all Insets
40209 \begin_layout Standard
40210 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40213 \begin_layout Subsection
40214 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40217 \begin_layout Standard
40218 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40222 Math macros are described in the
40229 \begin_layout Subsection
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40241 reference "sec:Navigating"
40246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40248 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40255 \begin_layout Subsection
40259 \begin_layout Standard
40260 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40268 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40275 \begin_layout Subsection
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40280 Opens a window showing console messages.
40281 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40286 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40287 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40288 is processing the document.
40291 \begin_layout Subsection
40293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40295 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40300 \begin_inset Index idx
40303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40312 \begin_layout Standard
40313 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40315 All toolbars and the
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40323 can be turned on and off.
40328 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40357 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40361 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40368 \begin_layout Standard
40373 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40377 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40378 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40379 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40380 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40381 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40386 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40387 \begin_inset space ~
40391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40393 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40400 \begin_layout Subsection
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40408 \begin_inset space ~
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40424 \begin_inset space ~
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40433 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40434 's main window vertically while
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40462 will split it horizontally.
40463 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40464 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40465 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40466 three or more documents at the same time.
40467 To close a split view, use the menu
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_layout Subsection
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40487 Closes a split view.
40490 \begin_layout Subsection
40494 \begin_layout Standard
40495 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40496 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40497 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40498 's main window fullscreen.
40499 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40500 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40503 \begin_layout Section
40505 \begin_inset Index idx
40508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40517 \begin_layout Subsection
40521 \begin_layout Standard
40522 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40529 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40540 \begin_layout Subsection
40542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40544 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40552 Here you can insert the following characters:
40555 \begin_layout Description
40560 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40563 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40564 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40565 -packages you have installed.
40566 You can get a complete display by checking
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40575 \begin_inset Newline newline
40579 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 Not all characters will be visible in the
40591 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40592 dialog (see section
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40599 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40603 ) can display every character.
40611 \begin_layout Description
40612 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40616 \begin_layout Description
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40625 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40632 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40639 \begin_layout Description
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40644 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40654 \begin_layout Description
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40659 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40663 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40669 \begin_layout Description
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40674 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40678 \begin_layout Description
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40683 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40687 \begin_layout Description
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40693 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40694 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40700 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40705 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40711 \begin_inset space \space{}
40714 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40715 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40724 To insert a fraction use the command
40729 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40733 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40742 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40749 \begin_layout Description
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40754 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40758 \begin_layout Description
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset Index idx
40767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40774 \begin_inset Index idx
40777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40778 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40783 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40784 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40786 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40792 \begin_inset Index idx
40795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40803 \begin_inset Newline newline
40806 More information about this feature can be found in the
40812 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40818 \begin_layout Description
40819 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40821 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40822 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40826 \begin_layout Subsection
40830 \begin_layout Standard
40831 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40834 \begin_layout Description
40835 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40836 \begin_inset script superscript
40838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40847 \begin_layout Description
40848 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40849 \begin_inset script subscript
40851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40860 \begin_layout Description
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40865 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40872 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40879 \begin_layout Description
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40891 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40898 \begin_layout Description
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40910 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40917 \begin_layout Description
40919 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40924 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40930 \begin_inset space \space{}
40933 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40934 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40943 To insert a fraction use the command
40948 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40952 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40961 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40970 \begin_layout Description
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40975 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40982 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40989 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40994 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41001 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41008 \begin_layout Description
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41013 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41020 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41027 \begin_layout Description
41028 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41035 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41047 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41061 \begin_layout Description
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41066 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41073 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41089 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41098 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41105 for a usage example.
41108 \begin_layout Description
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41117 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41124 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41136 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41137 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41140 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41147 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41159 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41166 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41173 \begin_layout Description
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41178 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41179 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41187 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41194 \begin_layout Description
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41199 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41206 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41222 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41229 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41236 \begin_layout Subsection
41238 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41242 \begin_layout Standard
41244 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41245 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41246 The submenu allows you to insert
41249 \begin_layout Description
41251 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41259 \begin_layout Description
41261 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41270 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41274 \begin_layout Description
41276 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41281 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41284 \begin_layout Description
41286 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41291 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41294 \begin_layout Description
41296 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41305 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41309 \begin_layout Description
41311 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41316 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41334 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41337 \begin_layout Description
41339 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41344 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41346 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41360 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41369 \begin_layout Description
41371 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41372 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41373 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41374 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41377 \begin_layout Subsection
41380 List/Contents/References
41383 \begin_layout Standard
41384 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41409 are described in section
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41416 reference "sec:toc"
41425 is described in section
41426 \begin_inset space ~
41430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41432 reference "sec:Index"
41440 is described in section
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41447 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41453 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41456 is described in section
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41463 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41470 \begin_layout Subsection
41474 \begin_layout Standard
41475 To insert floats, as described in section
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41482 reference "sec:Floats"
41486 and in detail the chapter
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41501 \begin_layout Subsection
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41506 To insert notes, described in section
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41513 reference "sec:Notes"
41520 \begin_layout Subsection
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41525 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41527 Branches are described in section
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41534 reference "sec:Branches"
41541 \begin_layout Subsection
41545 \begin_layout Standard
41546 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41547 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41549 An example is the document class
41550 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41560 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41569 with three custom insets.
41572 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41576 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41582 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41585 \begin_layout Subsection
41587 \begin_inset Index idx
41590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41599 \begin_layout Standard
41600 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41602 For more information see chapter
41604 External Document Parts
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_layout Subsection
41615 \begin_inset Index idx
41618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 \begin_layout Standard
41628 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41629 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_layout Subsection
41648 \begin_layout Standard
41653 dialog as described in section
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41660 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41667 \begin_layout Subsection
41671 \begin_layout Standard
41676 as described in section
41677 \begin_inset space ~
41681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41683 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41690 \begin_layout Subsection
41694 \begin_layout Standard
41699 as described in section
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41706 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41713 \begin_layout Subsection
41715 \begin_inset Index idx
41718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 \begin_inset Index idx
41728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41729 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41737 \begin_layout Standard
41738 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41739 Floats are described in section
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41746 reference "sec:Floats"
41750 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41753 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41769 \begin_layout Subsection
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41774 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41775 \begin_inset space ~
41779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41781 reference "sec:Index"
41788 \begin_layout Subsection
41792 \begin_layout Standard
41793 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41800 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41807 \begin_layout Subsection
41811 \begin_layout Standard
41812 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41813 Tables are described in section
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41820 reference "sec:Tables"
41824 and in detail in the chapter
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41839 \begin_layout Subsection
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41849 Graphics are described in section
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41856 reference "sec:Graphics"
41863 \begin_layout Subsection
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 Inserts a URL as described in section
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41875 reference "subsec:URLs"
41882 \begin_layout Subsection
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41894 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41901 \begin_layout Subsection
41905 \begin_layout Standard
41906 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41913 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41920 \begin_layout Subsection
41924 \begin_layout Standard
41925 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41932 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41939 \begin_layout Subsection
41942 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41947 environments of the same type.
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41955 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41959 for an explanation.
41962 \begin_layout Subsection
41966 \begin_layout Standard
41967 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41968 title or caption of a float.
41969 Inserts a short title as described in section
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41976 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41983 \begin_layout Subsection
41988 \begin_layout Standard
41989 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41990 Code box as described in section
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41997 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42004 \begin_layout Subsection
42006 \begin_inset Index idx
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 \begin_layout Standard
42019 Inserts a program listings box.
42020 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42022 Program Code Listings
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42035 \begin_layout Subsection
42037 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42041 \begin_layout Standard
42043 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42044 Inserts the actual date.
42045 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42052 \begin_layout Subsection
42056 \begin_layout Standard
42057 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42064 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42071 \begin_layout Section
42073 \begin_inset Index idx
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42086 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42087 \begin_inset space ~
42090 of the current document.
42091 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42094 \begin_layout Subsection
42098 \begin_layout Standard
42099 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42100 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42101 to jump, for example, between section
42102 \begin_inset space ~
42106 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42110 2.5 and use the submenu
42113 \begin_inset space ~
42117 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42130 \begin_inset space ~
42134 \begin_inset space ~
42140 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42144 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42150 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42153 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42156 \begin_layout Standard
42157 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42166 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42169 \begin_inset space ~
42174 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42177 \begin_layout Subsection
42178 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42181 \begin_layout Standard
42182 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42186 \begin_layout Subsection
42190 \begin_layout Standard
42191 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42192 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42193 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42197 \begin_inset space ~
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42209 \begin_layout Subsection
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42214 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42217 The \SpecialChar LyX
42218 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42233 manual for a detailed description.
42236 \begin_layout Section
42238 \begin_inset Index idx
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42250 \begin_layout Subsection
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42255 Change Tracking is described in section
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42269 \begin_layout Subsection
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42278 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42279 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42280 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42282 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42283 to the clipboard or update the view.
42284 \begin_inset Newline newline
42287 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42294 Open Containing Directory
42296 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42297 's temporary folder for the document.
42298 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42299 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42300 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42301 For example some journals require to send the
42305 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42309 \begin_layout Subsection
42310 Start Appendix Here
42313 \begin_layout Standard
42314 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42315 as described in section
42316 \begin_inset space ~
42320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42322 reference "sec:Appendices"
42329 \begin_layout Subsection
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42339 default output format for the document (menu
42341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42343 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42345 \begin_inset space ~
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42361 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42365 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42368 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42369 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42371 \begin_inset space ~
42374 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42376 \begin_inset space ~
42379 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42397 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42401 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42402 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42404 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42405 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42407 \begin_inset space ~
42410 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42415 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42419 \begin_inset space ~
42423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42425 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42430 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42431 when it is first configured.
42432 The default output format is
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42443 \begin_layout Subsection
42444 View (Other Formats)
42447 \begin_layout Standard
42448 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42449 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42450 actual document with an external program.
42451 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42452 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42453 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42455 All possible formats are listed in section
42456 \begin_inset space ~
42460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42462 reference "subsec:Export"
42467 You should at least see the menu entry
42472 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42474 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42482 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42487 \begin_inset Index idx
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42500 \begin_layout Standard
42501 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42502 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42505 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42510 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42515 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42525 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42530 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42531 when it is first configured.
42534 \begin_layout Subsection
42536 \begin_inset space ~
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42544 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42547 \begin_layout Subsection
42548 Update (Other Formats)
42551 \begin_layout Standard
42552 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42553 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42556 \begin_layout Subsection
42557 View Master Document
42560 \begin_layout Standard
42561 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42577 \begin_inset space ~
42582 manual for more information on this topic).
42583 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42584 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42597 generates the output of the whole book, while
42601 will just output the chapter alone.
42604 \begin_layout Standard
42605 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42606 in the document settings (menu
42608 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42609 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42610 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42612 \begin_inset space ~
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42628 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42632 ) or in the preferences (menu
42634 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42635 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42637 \begin_inset space ~
42640 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42642 \begin_inset space ~
42645 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42663 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42670 \begin_layout Subsection
42671 Update Master Document
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42675 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42696 manual for more information on this topic).
42697 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42698 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42702 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42703 in the document settings (menu
42705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42707 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42709 \begin_inset space ~
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42725 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42729 ) or in the preferences (menu
42731 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42732 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42734 \begin_inset space ~
42737 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42739 \begin_inset space ~
42742 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42744 \begin_inset space ~
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42760 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42767 \begin_layout Subsection
42769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42771 name "subsec:Compressed"
42778 \begin_layout Standard
42779 Un/compresses the current document.
42780 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42781 compression (see the
42783 Additional Features
42785 manual for details).
42788 \begin_layout Subsection
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42796 \begin_layout Subsection
42800 \begin_layout Standard
42801 The document settings are described in appendix
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42808 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42815 \begin_layout Section
42817 \begin_inset Index idx
42820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42829 \begin_layout Subsection
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 Spell checking is explained in section
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42841 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42848 \begin_layout Subsection
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 The thesaurus is described in section
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42860 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42867 \begin_layout Subsection
42869 \begin_inset Index idx
42872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42879 \begin_inset Index idx
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42892 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42893 the highlighted document part.
42896 \begin_layout Subsection
42902 \begin_inset Index idx
42905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42906 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42915 \begin_layout Standard
42916 Generates with the help of the program
42918 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42921 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42922 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42923 This feature is not available on Windows.
42926 \begin_layout Subsection
42932 \begin_inset Index idx
42935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42946 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42951 \begin_inset space ~
42956 to see the full filename paths.
42959 \begin_layout Subsection
42961 \begin_inset Index idx
42964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42975 files as described in section
42976 \begin_inset space ~
42980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42982 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42989 \begin_layout Subsection
42991 \begin_inset Index idx
42994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43007 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 \begin_inset Index idx
43028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43029 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43038 \begin_layout Standard
43039 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43040 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43041 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43042 -packages and programs it needs; see
43044 \begin_inset space ~
43048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43050 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43057 \begin_layout Subsection
43061 \begin_layout Standard
43066 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43067 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43073 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43080 \begin_layout Section
43082 \begin_inset Index idx
43085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43094 \begin_layout Standard
43095 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43096 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43098 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43102 \begin_layout Standard
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43111 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43112 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43113 packages and classes found
43114 by \SpecialChar LyX
43116 \begin_inset space ~
43120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43122 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43129 \begin_layout Standard
43133 \begin_inset space ~
43138 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43143 \begin_layout Section
43145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43147 name "sec:Toolbars"
43154 \begin_layout Standard
43155 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43156 \begin_inset space ~
43160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43162 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43169 \begin_layout Standard
43170 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43171 This is described in the
43173 Additional Features
43178 \begin_layout Subsection
43180 \begin_inset Index idx
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43193 \begin_inset Graphics
43194 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43202 \begin_layout Standard
43203 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43210 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43227 \begin_inset Note Note
43230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43236 manual for more information.
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43252 \begin_inset Tabular
43253 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43254 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43262 \begin_inset Graphics
43263 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 pull-down box for the environments
43290 \begin_layout Standard
43291 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43297 \begin_layout Standard
43299 \begin_inset Tabular
43300 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43301 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43302 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43303 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43387 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43403 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 arg "spelling-continuously"
43441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43445 Spellcheck continuously
43451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43564 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43596 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43601 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43619 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43633 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43659 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43701 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43715 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43716 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43744 Emphasize text, function of the
43745 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43753 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43761 arg "dialog-show character"
43772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43793 Set text to noun style, function of the
43794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43810 arg "dialog-show character"
43821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43830 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43864 arg "textstyle-apply"
43874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43880 Format text using the current settings in the
43882 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43884 \begin_inset space ~
43887 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43922 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43942 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43970 arg "tabular-insert"
43978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44000 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44032 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44044 Toggle outline window on/off,
44046 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44089 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44114 \begin_layout Subsection
44116 \begin_inset Index idx
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 \begin_layout Standard
44129 \begin_inset Graphics
44130 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44139 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44145 \begin_layout Standard
44146 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44150 \begin_layout Standard
44151 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44157 \begin_layout Standard
44158 \begin_inset Tabular
44159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44160 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44161 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44162 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44226 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44253 arg "layout-toggle List"
44261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44280 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 arg "depth-increment"
44315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44321 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44345 arg "depth-decrement"
44353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 arg "float-insert figure"
44391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44398 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44414 arg "float-insert table"
44422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44429 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44475 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44569 arg "nomencl-insert"
44577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44603 arg "footnote-insert"
44611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44633 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44682 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44778 \begin_inset space ~
44787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44796 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44811 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44842 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 arg "dialog-show character"
44870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44881 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44894 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44899 arg "textstyle-apply"
44907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44912 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44913 Format text using the recent settings in the
44916 arg "dialog-show character"
44925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 arg "layout-paragraph"
44942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44996 \begin_layout Subsection
44997 View/Update Toolbar
44998 \begin_inset Index idx
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45002 Toolbar ! View / Update
45010 \begin_layout Standard
45011 \begin_inset Graphics
45012 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45019 \begin_layout Standard
45020 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45026 \begin_layout Standard
45027 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45031 \begin_layout Standard
45032 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45038 \begin_layout Standard
45039 \begin_inset Tabular
45040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45041 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45083 arg "buffer-update"
45091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 arg "master-buffer-view"
45121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45147 arg "master-buffer-update"
45155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45201 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45202 Synchronize with Output
45208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45219 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45236 View (Other Formats)
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 arg "update-others"
45253 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45268 Update (Other Formats)
45281 \begin_layout Standard
45283 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45284 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45290 \begin_layout Subsection
45294 \begin_layout Standard
45295 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45302 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45306 , the table toolbar
45307 \begin_inset Index idx
45310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45324 manual and the math macro toolbar
45325 \begin_inset Index idx
45328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 \begin_layout Chapter
45342 The Document Settings
45343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45345 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45350 \begin_inset Index idx
45353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45354 Document ! Settings
45362 \begin_layout Standard
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45371 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45372 is called with the menu
45374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45378 You can save your document settings as default with the
45380 Save as Document Defaults
45382 button in any dialog.
45383 This will create a template named
45387 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45388 when you create a new document without
45392 \begin_layout Standard
45397 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45398 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45401 \begin_layout Standard
45402 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45403 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45404 to find the one you are looking for.
45405 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45406 the submenus of the dialog.
45408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45412 \begin_inset space \space{}
45416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45423 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45424 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45425 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45428 \begin_layout Section
45432 \begin_layout Standard
45433 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45435 Document classes are described in section
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45442 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45454 \begin_inset space ~
45459 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45464 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45465 as a layout for a document class.
45466 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45468 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45477 \begin_layout Standard
45478 Some classes use special class options by default.
45479 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45483 and you can decide to use them or not.
45484 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45485 recommended you leave them untouched.
45490 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45491 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45496 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45498 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45505 \begin_inset Newline newline
45510 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45513 \begin_inset Newline newline
45516 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45517 distribution, see section
45522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45524 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45537 \begin_layout Standard
45542 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45543 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45544 in the background if the child document
45545 is opened without its master.
45546 This way child documents are always compilable.
45547 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_layout Standard
45563 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45574 \begin_inset Index idx
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 packages ! prettyref
45585 \begin_inset Index idx
45588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45590 packages ! refstyle
45595 for cross-references, see section
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45602 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45609 \begin_layout Section
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45614 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45615 Please refer to the section
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45631 manual for details.
45634 \begin_layout Section
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45639 Modules are explained in section
45640 \begin_inset space ~
45644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45646 reference "subsec:Modules"
45653 \begin_layout Section
45657 \begin_layout Standard
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45665 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45672 \begin_layout Section
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45677 The document font settings are described in section
45678 \begin_inset space ~
45682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45684 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45691 \begin_layout Section
45695 \begin_layout Standard
45696 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45713 and whether it should be a
45716 \begin_inset space ~
45721 can also be specified here.
45724 \begin_layout Standard
45725 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45726 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45727 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45729 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45732 \begin_layout Standard
45735 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45738 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45739 justifies the text on screen.
45740 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45742 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45746 \begin_layout Standard
45748 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45757 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45762 \begin_layout Section
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45767 This dialog is described in sections
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45774 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45781 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45788 \begin_layout Section
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45794 \begin_inset space ~
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45800 reference "subsec:Margins"
45807 \begin_layout Section
45809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45811 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45816 \begin_inset Index idx
45819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45820 Language ! Encoding
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45829 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45830 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45831 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45833 is always encoded in utf8).
45834 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45835 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45836 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45837 -command is not known for
45838 a particular character).
45839 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45843 \begin_layout Standard
45845 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45846 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45847 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45848 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45849 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45850 's default encoding).
45851 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45852 's Unicode support covers the
45853 characters of most scripts.
45854 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45855 using one of the traditional, or
45856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45863 , encodings is necessary.
45866 \begin_layout Standard
45868 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45870 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45873 Traditional (auto-selected)
45879 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45880 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45881 the given language(s).
45883 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45887 \begin_layout Standard
45889 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45890 If you use the option
45895 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45898 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45899 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45902 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45905 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45906 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45907 exactly one encoding.
45908 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45913 \begin_layout Standard
45915 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45916 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45922 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45923 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45927 \begin_layout Standard
45929 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45930 Finally, you can also select
45934 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45935 Note that this encoding is then used for
45940 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45941 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45945 \begin_layout Standard
45947 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45950 Do not load inputenc
45952 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45953 from automatically loading the
45960 \begin_inset Index idx
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45967 packages ! inputenc
45973 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45974 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45975 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45976 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45977 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45979 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45985 Traditional (auto-selected)
45992 \begin_layout Standard
45994 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45996 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45997 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45998 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45999 installation supports Unicode), choose
46000 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46001 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46002 is quite incomplete, so
46003 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46008 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46009 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46010 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46011 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46012 -commands is not used, because all
46013 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46014 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46015 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46016 , two new alternative engines
46017 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46019 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46021 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46024 \begin_inset space ~
46032 \begin_inset space ~
46040 \begin_inset space ~
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46052 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46057 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46061 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46075 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46076 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46086 The possible settings are:
46089 \begin_layout Description
46090 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46093 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46103 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46110 \begin_layout Description
46111 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46112 format you will use.
46113 In many cases this will be
46118 \begin_inset Index idx
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 If the newer package
46134 \begin_inset Index idx
46137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46139 packages ! polyglossia
46144 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46145 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46146 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46148 this package will be used instead of
46155 \begin_layout Description
46157 \begin_inset space ~
46168 would be more appropriate.
46171 \begin_layout Description
46172 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46173 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46177 (for German texts), type in
46180 \begin_inset Newline newline
46185 usepackage{ngerman}
46188 \begin_layout Description
46189 None will not use a language package.
46190 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46193 \begin_layout Standard
46194 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46197 \begin_layout Description
46199 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46216 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46222 \begin_inset Index idx
46225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46227 packages ! inputenc
46233 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46234 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46235 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46241 \begin_layout Description
46242 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46244 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46245 commands, which may result in a big
46246 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46247 -commands are needed.
46249 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46250 This is the same as the
46263 \begin_layout Description
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset space ~
46272 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46275 \begin_layout Description
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46287 \begin_layout Description
46289 \begin_inset space ~
46292 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46295 \begin_layout Description
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46304 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46305 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46308 \begin_layout Description
46310 \begin_inset space ~
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46317 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46321 \begin_layout Description
46323 \begin_inset space ~
46327 \begin_inset space ~
46330 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46331 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46334 \begin_layout Description
46336 \begin_inset space ~
46340 \begin_inset space ~
46344 \begin_inset space ~
46347 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46348 \begin_inset space ~
46354 \begin_layout Description
46356 \begin_inset space ~
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46367 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46368 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46371 \begin_layout Description
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46377 \begin_inset space ~
46380 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46381 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46382 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46383 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46388 \begin_inset space ~
46394 \begin_layout Description
46396 \begin_inset space ~
46400 \begin_inset space ~
46403 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46404 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46405 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46407 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46408 \begin_inset space ~
46412 \begin_inset space ~
46418 \begin_layout Description
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46424 \begin_inset space ~
46427 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46430 \begin_layout Description
46432 \begin_inset space ~
46436 \begin_inset space ~
46439 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46442 \begin_layout Description
46444 \begin_inset space ~
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46451 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46454 \begin_layout Description
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46459 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46462 \begin_layout Description
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46467 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46470 \begin_layout Description
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46479 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46482 \begin_layout Description
46484 \begin_inset space ~
46488 \begin_inset space ~
46494 \begin_layout Description
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46503 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46506 \begin_layout Description
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46518 \begin_layout Description
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_inset space ~
46527 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46533 \begin_inset Index idx
46536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 , when using this, set the document language to
46548 \begin_layout Description
46550 \begin_inset space ~
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46557 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46562 , when using this, set the document language to
46565 \begin_inset space ~
46571 \begin_layout Description
46573 \begin_inset space ~
46577 \begin_inset space ~
46580 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46586 \begin_inset Index idx
46589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46591 packages ! japanese
46596 , when using this, set the document language to
46601 \begin_layout Description
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46607 \begin_inset space ~
46610 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46615 , when using this, set the document language to
46620 \begin_layout Description
46622 \begin_inset space ~
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46629 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46634 , when using this, set the document language to
46639 \begin_layout Description
46641 \begin_inset space ~
46644 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46647 \begin_layout Description
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46657 \begin_inset space ~
46660 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46663 \begin_layout Description
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46669 \begin_inset space ~
46673 \begin_inset space ~
46676 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46677 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46678 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46681 \begin_layout Description
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46693 \begin_layout Description
46695 \begin_inset space ~
46699 \begin_inset space ~
46702 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46703 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46706 \begin_layout Description
46708 \begin_inset space ~
46712 \begin_inset space ~
46715 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46721 \begin_inset Index idx
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46731 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46732 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46734 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46735 with the default encoding (
46737 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46743 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46744 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46749 \begin_layout Description
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46762 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46769 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46772 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46779 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46780 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46782 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46785 \begin_layout Description
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46791 \begin_inset space ~
46794 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46800 \begin_inset Index idx
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46811 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46814 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46816 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46817 This used to be more comprehensive than
46820 \begin_inset space ~
46825 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46830 \begin_layout Description
46832 \begin_inset space ~
46835 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46841 \begin_inset Index idx
46844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46846 packages ! inputenc
46853 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46854 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46856 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46857 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46858 with the default encoding (
46860 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46866 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46867 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46872 \begin_layout Description
46874 \begin_inset space ~
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46885 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46892 \begin_layout Description
46894 \begin_inset space ~
46898 \begin_inset space ~
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46905 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46906 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46907 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46911 \begin_layout Description
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46924 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46925 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46928 \begin_layout Section
46930 \begin_inset Index idx
46933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46940 \begin_inset Index idx
46943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 \begin_inset Index idx
46953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46954 Color ! Shaded boxes
46960 \begin_inset Index idx
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46972 \begin_layout Standard
46973 Here you can alter the font color for the
46977 (default: black), for
46980 \begin_inset space ~
46985 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46989 (default: white) and for
46992 \begin_inset space ~
47002 sets the color back to the default.
47005 \begin_layout Standard
47006 Clicking any button showing
47014 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47015 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47016 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47017 later more quickly.
47020 \begin_layout Standard
47021 Note, if you change the
47024 \begin_inset space ~
47029 font color and use the option
47032 \begin_inset space ~
47037 in the document settings under
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47045 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47052 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47059 \begin_layout Standard
47060 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47066 \begin_layout Standard
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47079 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47085 Code after a forced page break:
47088 \begin_layout Itemize
47089 For the page color:
47090 \begin_inset Newline newline
47097 pagecolor{color name}
47100 \begin_layout Itemize
47101 For the text color:
47102 \begin_inset Newline newline
47112 \begin_layout Standard
47113 You are restricted to one of
47149 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47162 \begin_inset Newline newline
47165 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47166 names to refer to them:
47169 \begin_layout Itemize
47175 \begin_inset Newline newline
47180 page_backgroundcolor
47183 \begin_layout Itemize
47187 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_inset Newline newline
47201 \begin_layout Itemize
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47211 \begin_inset Newline newline
47219 \begin_layout Itemize
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47237 \begin_layout Standard
47238 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47249 \begin_inset space ~
47257 \begin_layout Section
47259 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47263 \begin_layout Standard
47265 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47266 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47267 \begin_inset space ~
47271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47273 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47281 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47282 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47285 \begin_layout Standard
47287 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47288 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47290 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47293 \begin_layout Section
47297 \begin_layout Standard
47298 Here you can adjust the
47302 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47306 as described in section
47307 \begin_inset space ~
47311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47313 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47318 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47322 \begin_layout Standard
47324 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47325 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47327 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47328 of this package can be used as well.
47329 The most common one are:
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47335 right Line numbers to the right margin
47338 \begin_layout Description
47340 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47341 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47345 \begin_layout Description
47347 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47348 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47351 \begin_layout Description
47353 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47354 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47357 \begin_layout Description
47359 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47361 \begin_inset space ~
47364 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47369 \begin_layout Section
47373 \begin_layout Standard
47374 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47380 \begin_inset Index idx
47383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47385 packages ! biblatex
47395 \begin_inset Index idx
47398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47410 \begin_inset Index idx
47413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47421 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47424 Sectioned bibliography
47426 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47432 \begin_inset Index idx
47435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47437 packages ! bibtopic
47447 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47448 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47452 for the generation of the bibliography.
47453 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47454 \begin_inset space ~
47458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47460 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47467 \begin_layout Section
47471 \begin_layout Standard
47472 Here you can define the
47476 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47484 reference "sec:Index"
47491 \begin_layout Section
47495 \begin_layout Standard
47496 The PDF properties are explained in section
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47503 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47510 \begin_layout Section
47514 \begin_layout Standard
47515 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47516 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47522 \begin_inset Index idx
47525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47537 \begin_inset Index idx
47540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47552 \begin_inset Index idx
47555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47567 \begin_inset Index idx
47570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47582 \begin_inset Index idx
47585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47587 packages ! mathdots
47597 \begin_inset Index idx
47600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47602 packages ! mathtools
47612 \begin_inset Index idx
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47627 \begin_inset Index idx
47630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47632 packages ! stackrel
47642 \begin_inset Index idx
47645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47647 packages ! stmaryrd
47657 \begin_inset Index idx
47660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47662 packages ! undertilde
47667 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47670 \begin_layout Description
47671 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47672 -errors in formulas,
47673 ensure that you have this enabled.
47676 \begin_layout Description
47677 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47678 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47679 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47683 \begin_layout Description
47684 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_layout Description
47700 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47715 \begin_layout Description
47716 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47727 \begin_layout Description
47728 mathtools is used for the math commands
47764 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47771 \begin_layout Description
47772 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47774 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47783 \begin_layout Description
47784 stackrel is used for the math command
47801 \begin_layout Description
47802 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47805 \begin_layout Description
47806 undertilde is used for the math command
47814 Accents for one Character
47823 \begin_layout Section
47825 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47827 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47833 \begin_layout Standard
47835 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47836 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47839 \begin_layout Standard
47841 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47842 The float placement options
47843 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47846 are described in the section
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47853 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47855 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47863 \begin_inset space ~
47871 \begin_layout Section
47875 \begin_layout Standard
47876 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47878 Program Code Listings
47883 \begin_inset space ~
47891 \begin_layout Section
47895 \begin_layout Standard
47896 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47904 set to be used and set the
47909 The itemize environment is described in section
47910 \begin_inset space ~
47914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47916 reference "sec:Itemize"
47923 \begin_layout Standard
47924 You can furthermore specify a
47927 \begin_inset space ~
47932 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47933 command of the desired character.
47934 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47941 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47947 \begin_inset space \space{}
47951 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47961 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47962 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47965 \begin_layout Standard
47966 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47974 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47975 -packages in the preamble (menu
47978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47979 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47988 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47992 usepackage{textcomp}
47995 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47999 usepackage{amssymb}
48009 \begin_layout Section
48013 \begin_layout Standard
48014 Branches are described in section
48015 \begin_inset space ~
48019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48021 reference "sec:Branches"
48028 \begin_layout Section
48030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48032 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48039 \begin_layout Standard
48040 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48043 \begin_layout Description
48045 \begin_inset space ~
48049 \begin_inset space ~
48052 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48072 View Master Document
48073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48080 Update Master Document
48081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48088 menu or the toolbar.
48089 The default is set in
48091 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48092 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48094 \begin_inset space ~
48097 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48101 \begin_inset space ~
48105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48107 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48114 \begin_layout Description
48116 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48118 \begin_inset space ~
48122 \begin_inset space ~
48126 \begin_inset space ~
48129 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48134 option which is needed with some packages.
48135 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48136 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48139 \begin_layout Description
48141 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48147 \begin_inset space ~
48150 Options offers settings for the
48158 \begin_layout Itemize
48162 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48164 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48166 \begin_inset space ~
48172 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48174 \begin_inset space ~
48178 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48184 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48186 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48187 settings for the menu
48189 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48193 \begin_inset space ~
48197 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48200 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48201 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48206 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48208 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48210 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48213 or a detailed description see section
48215 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48220 \begin_inset space ~
48226 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48230 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48234 \begin_layout Itemize
48236 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48239 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48241 determines whether so-called
48242 \begin_inset Quotes els
48246 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48250 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48252 \begin_inset Quotes els
48256 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48259 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48260 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48261 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48263 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48265 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48266 macros, you can uncheck this.
48267 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48274 \begin_layout Description
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48280 \begin_inset space ~
48283 Options offers settings for the export format
48291 \begin_inset space ~
48296 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48297 \begin_inset space ~
48300 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48304 \begin_inset space ~
48309 settings are described in detail in section
48311 Math Output in XHTML
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48325 \begin_inset space ~
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48334 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48337 \begin_layout Description
48339 \begin_inset space ~
48344 Save transient properties
48346 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48347 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48348 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48352 \begin_layout Itemize
48353 the activation of change tracking
48356 \begin_layout Itemize
48357 the output of tracked changes
48360 \begin_layout Itemize
48361 the recording of the document directory path.
48364 \begin_layout Standard
48365 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48366 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48370 \begin_layout Section
48378 \begin_layout Standard
48379 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48381 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48383 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48385 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48389 \begin_layout Standard
48390 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48391 -syntax is given in section
48392 \begin_inset space ~
48396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48398 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48405 \begin_layout Chapter
48411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48413 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48418 \begin_inset Index idx
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48430 \begin_layout Standard
48431 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48437 It has the following submenus.
48440 \begin_layout Section
48444 \begin_layout Subsection
48448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48449 User Interface File
48450 \begin_inset Index idx
48453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 Customization ! of toolbars
48460 \begin_inset Index idx
48463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48464 Customization ! of menus
48472 \begin_layout Standard
48473 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48474 interface (ui) file.
48475 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48483 \begin_layout Description
48488 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48491 \begin_layout Description
48498 the menu entries in popup context menus
48501 \begin_layout Description
48506 specifies the toolbar buttons
48509 \begin_layout Standard
48510 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48511 and edit the entries.
48514 \begin_layout Standard
48515 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48527 entries must be finished with an explicit
48552 and in the case of the
48553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48565 The syntax for the entries is:
48568 \begin_layout Standard
48569 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48598 \begin_layout Standard
48600 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48603 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48604 -functions are listed in the menu
48606 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48608 \begin_inset space ~
48616 \begin_layout Standard
48617 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48623 \begin_layout Standard
48624 For example, assuming you use the menu
48626 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48629 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48633 \begin_layout Standard
48634 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48658 \begin_layout Standard
48660 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48675 to have the sixth bookmark.
48678 \begin_layout Standard
48682 \begin_inset space ~
48687 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48688 's toolbar buttons.
48689 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48693 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48705 \begin_layout Standard
48708 Enable tool tips in main work area
48710 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48718 \begin_layout Standard
48723 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48724 should display in the menu
48726 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48728 \begin_inset space ~
48736 \begin_layout Subsection
48740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48744 \begin_layout Standard
48747 Restore window layouts and geometries
48750 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48751 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48755 \begin_layout Standard
48758 Restore cursor positions
48760 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48764 \begin_layout Standard
48767 Load opened files from last session
48769 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48773 \begin_layout Standard
48776 Clear all session information
48778 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48779 sessions (cursor positions, names
48780 of last opened documents, etc.).
48783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48787 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48792 \begin_inset Index idx
48795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 \begin_layout Standard
48807 Backup original documents when saving
48809 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48810 it was saved the last time.
48811 It is stored in the
48814 \begin_inset space ~
48820 \begin_inset space ~
48824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48826 reference "sec:Paths"
48830 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48833 \begin_inset space ~
48839 The backup file has the file extension
48840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48854 \begin_layout Standard
48857 Backup documents, every
48859 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48862 \begin_layout Standard
48865 Save documents compressed by default
48867 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48868 \begin_inset space ~
48872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48874 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48879 This applies to newly created documents only.
48880 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48884 Windows & work area
48887 \begin_layout Standard
48890 Open documents in tabs
48892 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48896 \begin_layout Standard
48901 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48908 \begin_inset space ~
48912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48914 reference "sec:Paths"
48918 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48925 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48926 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48927 of \SpecialChar LyX
48929 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48930 instance is created for each file.
48933 \begin_layout Standard
48936 Single close-tab button
48938 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48948 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48949 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48950 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48954 \begin_layout Standard
48955 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48963 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48964 before the change takes effect.
48972 \begin_layout Standard
48977 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48979 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48981 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48985 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48986 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48987 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48990 \begin_layout Subsection
48992 \begin_inset Index idx
48995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49004 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49011 \begin_layout Standard
49012 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49016 \begin_layout Standard
49017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49025 This section only deals with the fonts
49029 the \SpecialChar LyX
49031 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49035 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49046 \begin_layout Standard
49047 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49064 (depends on the system) as its
49067 \begin_inset space ~
49083 \begin_layout Standard
49084 You can change the font size with the
49091 \begin_layout Standard
49096 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49101 points have the size of 1
49102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49106 \begin_inset space ~
49110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49112 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49117 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49122 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49129 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49136 \begin_layout Subsection
49138 \begin_inset Index idx
49141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49142 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49149 \begin_inset Index idx
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 \begin_layout Standard
49162 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49163 by choosing an item in the
49164 list and selecting the
49171 \begin_layout Standard
49172 By checking the option
49176 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49179 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49184 \begin_inset space ~
49189 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49192 \begin_layout Subsection
49194 \begin_inset Index idx
49197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49206 \begin_layout Standard
49207 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49211 \begin_layout Standard
49216 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49217 This feature is described in section
49218 \begin_inset space ~
49222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49224 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49231 \begin_layout Standard
49232 Checking the option
49235 \begin_inset space ~
49239 \begin_inset space ~
49243 \begin_inset space ~
49248 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49251 \begin_layout Section
49253 \begin_inset Index idx
49256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49265 \begin_layout Subsection
49269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49273 \begin_layout Standard
49276 Cursor follows scrollbar
49278 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49282 \begin_layout Standard
49283 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49284 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49285 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49288 \begin_layout Standard
49291 Scroll below end of document
49293 is self-explanatory.
49296 \begin_layout Standard
49297 In \SpecialChar LyX
49298 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49305 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49307 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49308 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49309 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49313 \begin_layout Standard
49315 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49318 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49320 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49321 paste operations (i.
49322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49325 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49326 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49327 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49328 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49329 dissolving from insets.
49334 \begin_layout Standard
49337 Sort environments alphabetically
49339 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49342 \begin_layout Standard
49345 Group environments by their category
49347 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49350 \begin_layout Standard
49355 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49370 \begin_layout Standard
49371 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49376 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49377 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49381 \begin_layout Subsection
49383 \begin_inset Index idx
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49393 \begin_inset Index idx
49396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49397 Settings ! Shortcuts
49405 \begin_layout Standard
49410 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49412 Several binding files are available, among them:
49415 \begin_layout Description
49416 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49419 \begin_layout Description
49420 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49432 \begin_layout Description
49433 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49444 \begin_layout Standard
49445 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49450 , and binding files for special languages.
49451 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49456 \begin_inset space \space{}
49460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49468 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49469 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49470 will try to use the appropriate binding
49474 \begin_layout Standard
49475 Some binding files, like
49479 , only have a limited scope.
49480 When looking at the end of the file
49484 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49487 \begin_layout Standard
49491 \begin_inset space ~
49495 \begin_inset space ~
49500 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49501 in the selected key binding file.
49504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49508 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49513 \begin_inset Index idx
49516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49517 Key Bindings ! Editing
49525 \begin_layout Standard
49526 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49527 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49528 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49529 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49532 Show key-bindings containing
49535 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49536 Insert there for example as keyword
49537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49544 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49545 functions that contain
49546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49554 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49555 All \SpecialChar LyX
49556 functions are also listed in the file
49561 that you will find in the
49568 \begin_layout Standard
49569 For example, to add the shortcut
49577 , select the function and press the
49582 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49583 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49586 \begin_layout Standard
49587 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49588 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49590 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49591 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49593 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49598 \begin_layout Standard
49599 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49602 \begin_layout Standard
49603 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49605 The syntax of the entries is:
49608 \begin_layout Standard
49614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49633 \begin_layout Standard
49634 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49635 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49663 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49664 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49665 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49666 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49668 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49672 , you needed to specify it as
49677 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49680 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49683 \begin_layout Subsection
49685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49687 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49692 \begin_inset Index idx
49695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49702 \begin_inset Index idx
49705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49706 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49714 \begin_layout Standard
49715 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49716 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49717 provides keyboard maps.
49718 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49719 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49722 \begin_inset space ~
49726 \begin_inset space ~
49731 and select the keyboard map file named
49738 \begin_layout Standard
49747 keyboard map and, if you use the
49751 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49754 arg "keymap-primary"
49760 arg "keymap-secondary"
49763 respectively or toggle between them with
49766 arg "keymap-toggle"
49772 \begin_layout Standard
49773 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49781 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49790 \begin_layout Standard
49791 You can also specify the mouse
49793 Wheel scrolling speed
49796 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49800 Middle mouse button pasting
49802 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49803 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49806 \begin_layout Standard
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49823 you can select a key for zooming.
49824 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49827 \begin_layout Subsection
49831 \begin_layout Standard
49832 Input completion is described in section
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49839 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49846 \begin_layout Section
49848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49855 \begin_inset Index idx
49858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49865 \begin_inset Index idx
49868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49877 \begin_layout Standard
49878 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49879 are normally determined during
49881 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49884 \begin_layout Description
49886 \begin_inset space ~
49889 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49890 's working directory.
49891 It is the default when you
49902 \begin_inset space ~
49910 \begin_layout Description
49912 \begin_inset space ~
49915 templates This directory
49916 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49917 contains the templates that are shown
49918 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49919 will be opened when you use the menu
49920 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49925 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49927 \begin_inset space ~
49931 \begin_inset space ~
49939 \begin_layout Description
49941 \begin_inset space ~
49944 files This directory
49945 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49946 will be opened when you use the
49947 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49948 contains the example files that are listed in
49951 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49960 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49962 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49964 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49970 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49972 \begin_inset Newline newline
49976 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49988 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49989 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49999 \begin_layout Description
50001 \begin_inset space ~
50005 \begin_inset Index idx
50008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50015 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50016 \begin_inset space ~
50020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50022 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50030 will be used to save the backups.
50031 \begin_inset Newline newline
50034 Backup files have the ending
50035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50045 \begin_layout Description
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50050 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50051 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50053 \begin_inset Newline newline
50060 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50066 You can edit this file with the program
50075 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50076 in its preferences under
50079 \begin_inset space ~
50085 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50090 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50092 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50093 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50099 and \SpecialChar LyX
50100 need to be running the same time.
50101 \begin_inset Newline newline
50104 The pipe is also used for the
50108 feature, see section
50109 \begin_inset space ~
50113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50115 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50120 \begin_inset Newline newline
50123 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50124 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50125 \begin_inset Newline newline
50141 \begin_layout Description
50143 \begin_inset space ~
50146 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50149 \begin_layout Description
50151 \begin_inset space ~
50154 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50155 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50156 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50159 \begin_layout Description
50161 \begin_inset space ~
50164 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50170 You only need to specify it if you are using
50174 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50176 For \SpecialChar LyX
50181 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50185 \begin_layout Description
50187 \begin_inset space ~
50190 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50191 When \SpecialChar LyX
50192 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50193 to find it on the system.
50194 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50196 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50205 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50206 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50209 \begin_layout Description
50211 \begin_inset space ~
50214 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50215 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50216 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50217 code or in the document
50219 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50221 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50222 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50223 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50224 scanned for the input files.
50225 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50226 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50228 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50229 compilation may fail for some documents.
50232 \begin_layout Section
50236 \begin_layout Standard
50237 Here you can insert your
50246 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50248 \begin_inset space ~
50252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50254 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50258 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50261 \begin_layout Section
50263 \begin_inset Index idx
50266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50267 Language ! Settings
50273 \begin_inset Index idx
50276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50277 Settings ! Language
50285 \begin_layout Subsection
50287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50289 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50296 \begin_layout Description
50298 \begin_inset space ~
50302 \begin_inset space ~
50305 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50307 You can find its actual translation status here:
50308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50310 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50316 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50322 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50323 LaTeX Language Support
50328 \begin_layout Description
50330 \begin_inset space ~
50333 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50334 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50335 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50336 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50353 The most widespread language package is
50358 \begin_inset Index idx
50361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50368 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50370 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50371 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50372 come with the alternative
50378 \begin_inset Index idx
50381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50383 packages ! polyglossia
50388 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50389 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50395 The available selections are described in section
50396 \begin_inset space ~
50400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50402 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50409 \begin_layout Description
50411 \begin_inset space ~
50415 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50416 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50417 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50419 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50423 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50427 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50429 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50433 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50434 that is used to switch to a different language
50435 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50436 to start the package
50440 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50441 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50445 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50446 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50449 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50453 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50461 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50469 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50472 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50474 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50496 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50497 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50504 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50505 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50510 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50515 , this setting is ignored.
50520 \begin_layout Description
50522 \begin_inset space ~
50526 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50533 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50534 Use this if the language switch set in
50538 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50542 's alternative command
50546 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50547 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50550 end{otherlanguage*}
50554 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50555 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50556 command toggles the package on and off
50557 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50558 Empty by default, as
50562 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50564 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50569 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50575 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50580 , this setting is ignored.
50585 \begin_layout Description
50587 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50589 \begin_inset space ~
50593 \begin_inset space ~
50596 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50600 \begin_layout Description
50602 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50611 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50617 \begin_layout Description
50619 \begin_inset space ~
50623 \begin_inset space ~
50627 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50629 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50632 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50633 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50636 to the document class options
50637 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50638 rather than the language package options.
50639 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50643 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50644 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50646 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50647 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50649 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50654 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50655 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50664 \begin_layout Description
50666 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50668 \begin_inset space ~
50672 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50674 \begin_inset space ~
50678 \begin_inset space ~
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50688 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50690 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50693 this option is set,
50694 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50695 the language switch defined in
50698 \begin_inset space ~
50703 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50704 to the document language.
50705 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50706 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50709 \begin_inset space ~
50714 or if a package resets the document language.
50715 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50716 usually should be the document language).
50717 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50718 documents start with the chosen document language.
50719 When this option is not set, the
50722 \begin_inset space ~
50727 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50729 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50732 \begin_inset space ~
50742 \begin_layout Description
50744 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50746 \begin_inset space ~
50750 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50752 \begin_inset space ~
50756 \begin_inset space ~
50760 \begin_inset space ~
50766 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50770 \begin_inset space ~
50774 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50775 Set document language explicitly
50781 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50783 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50789 \begin_inset space ~
50795 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50797 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50801 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50803 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50806 the end of the document.
50807 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50811 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50812 \paragraph_spacing single
50814 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50820 \begin_layout Description
50822 \begin_inset space ~
50826 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50828 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50832 \begin_inset space ~
50836 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50838 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50840 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50844 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50847 in a language different
50848 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50850 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50853 the document language will be
50854 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50855 marked (by default with a blue
50858 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50860 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50864 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50868 \begin_layout Description
50870 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50872 \begin_inset space ~
50876 \begin_inset space ~
50880 \begin_inset space ~
50883 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50884 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50885 switched via the operating system.
50886 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50891 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50892 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50897 \begin_layout Description
50899 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50901 \begin_inset space ~
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50908 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50909 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50914 \begin_layout Description
50916 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50918 \begin_inset space ~
50922 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50924 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50928 \begin_inset space ~
50932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50933 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50934 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50936 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50940 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50942 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50943 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50945 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50946 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50947 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50949 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50954 \begin_layout Standard
50959 means that the cursor
50960 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50961 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50962 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50967 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50968 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50972 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50974 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50975 specific case always means: move
50979 in text (even if this means:
50985 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50986 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50987 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50988 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50989 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51001 \begin_layout Standard
51003 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51008 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51009 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51010 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51014 ) when coming from the left.
51015 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51017 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51018 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51019 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51026 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51030 \begin_layout Description
51032 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51034 \begin_inset space ~
51038 \begin_inset space ~
51041 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51042 separator alignment).
51043 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51048 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51049 (static) custom character here.
51052 \begin_layout Description
51054 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51056 \begin_inset space ~
51060 \begin_inset space ~
51063 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51069 \begin_layout Subsection
51073 \begin_layout Standard
51074 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51075 \begin_inset space ~
51079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51081 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51088 \begin_layout Section
51092 \begin_layout Subsection
51094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51096 name "subsec:General-output"
51103 \begin_layout Description
51105 \begin_inset space ~
51108 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51110 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51112 \begin_inset space ~
51118 For a detailed description see section
51120 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51125 \begin_inset space ~
51133 \begin_layout Description
51135 \begin_inset space ~
51138 Options Options for the program
51142 that is used for the export format
51147 \begin_inset space ~
51151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51153 reference "subsec:Export"
51158 Possible options are listed in the
51163 \begin_inset Newline newline
51167 \begin_inset Flex URL
51170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51172 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51182 \begin_layout Description
51184 \begin_inset space ~
51188 \begin_inset space ~
51191 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51194 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51195 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51197 \begin_inset space ~
51203 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51206 \begin_layout Description
51208 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51210 \begin_inset space ~
51214 \begin_inset Index idx
51217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51224 \begin_inset Index idx
51227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51228 Settings ! Date format
51233 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51234 \begin_inset Newline newline
51238 \begin_inset Flex URL
51241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51243 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51249 \begin_inset Newline newline
51252 For example the format
51253 \begin_inset Newline newline
51257 \begin_inset Newline newline
51260 prints the date as day/month/year.
51265 \begin_layout Description
51267 \begin_inset space ~
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51274 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51275 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51278 \begin_layout Subsection
51284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51286 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51291 \begin_inset Index idx
51294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51295 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51304 \begin_layout Description
51306 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51308 \begin_inset space ~
51316 \begin_inset space ~
51320 \begin_inset space ~
51323 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51328 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51349 are used for Cyrillic.
51350 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51363 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51365 sets up in the background.
51366 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51371 \begin_layout Description
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51377 \begin_inset space ~
51381 \begin_inset space ~
51385 \begin_inset space ~
51388 options They only have an effect when the program
51392 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51395 \begin_layout Standard
51396 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51397 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51398 manuals of the applications.
51401 \begin_layout Description
51403 \begin_inset space ~
51406 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51407 \begin_inset space ~
51411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51413 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51420 \begin_layout Description
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51425 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51432 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51439 \begin_layout Description
51441 \begin_inset space ~
51444 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51445 \begin_inset space ~
51449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51451 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51458 \begin_layout Description
51464 \begin_inset space ~
51467 command Command for the program
51469 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51472 that is described in the section
51474 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51479 Additional Features
51484 \begin_layout Standard
51485 There are additionally the following options:
51488 \begin_layout Description
51490 \begin_inset space ~
51494 \begin_inset space ~
51498 \begin_inset space ~
51502 \begin_inset space ~
51507 \begin_inset space ~
51510 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51528 to separate folders.
51529 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51531 \begin_inset Index idx
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51541 \begin_inset Index idx
51544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51553 \begin_layout Description
51555 \begin_inset space ~
51559 \begin_inset space ~
51563 \begin_inset space ~
51567 \begin_inset space ~
51571 \begin_inset space ~
51575 \begin_inset space ~
51578 changes Removes all manually set
51584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51587 \begin_inset space ~
51592 dialog when changing the document class.
51595 \begin_layout Section
51597 \begin_inset space ~
51601 \begin_inset Index idx
51604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51613 \begin_layout Subsection
51615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51617 name "subsec:Converters"
51622 \begin_inset Index idx
51625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51634 \begin_layout Standard
51635 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51636 from one format to another.
51637 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51638 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51645 \begin_inset space ~
51650 field and press the
51655 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51659 \begin_inset space ~
51664 drop-down list, modify the
51668 field and press the
51675 \begin_layout Standard
51678 Converter File Cache
51684 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51686 Maximum Age (in days
51689 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51690 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51693 \begin_layout Standard
51694 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51695 definition, is described in the section
51706 \begin_layout Subsection
51708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51710 name "sec:File-Formats"
51715 \begin_inset Index idx
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51725 \begin_inset Index idx
51728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51737 \begin_layout Standard
51738 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51748 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51751 \begin_layout Standard
51752 You can also define the
51754 Default output format
51756 that is used when you use
51758 View, Update, View Master Document
51762 Update Master Document
51768 menu or the toolbar.
51771 \begin_layout Standard
51772 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51783 \begin_layout Standard
51784 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51786 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51787 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51788 This is done by specifying a
51793 More about this is described in the section
51804 \begin_layout Chapter
51805 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51807 \begin_inset Index idx
51810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51819 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51826 \begin_layout Standard
51828 \begin_inset space ~
51832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51834 reference "tab:Units"
51838 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51839 and used in this documentation.
51842 \begin_layout Standard
51843 \begin_inset Float table
51850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51851 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51869 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51877 \begin_inset Tabular
51878 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51879 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51880 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51881 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51882 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52035 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52306 scaled point (65536
52307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52374 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52498 % of original image width
52503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52587 \begin_layout Standard
52588 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52591 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52598 \begin_layout Bibliography
52599 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52600 LatexCommand bibitem
52607 The \SpecialChar LyX
52609 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52612 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52618 \begin_inset Newline newline
52622 \begin_inset Flex URL
52625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52627 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52635 \begin_layout Bibliography
52636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52637 LatexCommand bibitem
52638 key "latexcompanion"
52643 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52645 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52646 Companion Second Edition.
52649 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52652 \begin_layout Bibliography
52653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52654 LatexCommand bibitem
52660 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52663 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52667 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52670 \begin_layout Bibliography
52671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52672 LatexCommand bibitem
52681 : A Document Preparation System.
52684 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52687 \begin_layout Bibliography
52688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52689 LatexCommand bibitem
52699 The \SpecialChar TeX
52703 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52706 \begin_layout Bibliography
52707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52708 LatexCommand bibitem
52714 The \SpecialChar TeX
52716 \begin_inset Newline newline
52720 \begin_inset Flex URL
52723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52725 https://ctan.org/topic
52733 \begin_layout Bibliography
52734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52735 LatexCommand bibitem
52741 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52743 \begin_inset Newline newline
52747 \begin_inset Flex URL
52750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52752 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52760 \begin_layout Bibliography
52761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52762 LatexCommand bibitem
52769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52771 name "Documentation"
52772 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52779 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52783 \begin_inset Newline newline
52787 \begin_inset Flex URL
52790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52792 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52800 \begin_layout Bibliography
52801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52802 LatexCommand bibitem
52809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52811 name "Documentation"
52812 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52817 how to use the program
52819 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52823 \begin_inset Newline newline
52827 \begin_inset Flex URL
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52832 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52840 \begin_layout Bibliography
52841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52842 LatexCommand bibitem
52849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52851 name "Documentation"
52852 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52857 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52863 \begin_inset Index idx
52866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52868 packages ! biblatex
52874 \begin_inset Newline newline
52878 \begin_inset Flex URL
52881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52883 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52891 \begin_layout Bibliography
52892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52893 LatexCommand bibitem
52900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52902 name "Documentation"
52903 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52908 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52914 \begin_inset Index idx
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52925 \begin_inset Newline newline
52929 \begin_inset Flex URL
52932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52934 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52942 \begin_layout Bibliography
52943 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52944 LatexCommand bibitem
52951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52953 name "Documentation"
52954 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52964 \begin_inset Newline newline
52968 \begin_inset Flex URL
52971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52973 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52981 \begin_layout Bibliography
52982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52983 LatexCommand bibitem
52984 key "makeindex-man"
52990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52993 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53003 \begin_inset Newline newline
53007 \begin_inset Flex URL
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53012 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53020 \begin_layout Bibliography
53021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53022 LatexCommand bibitem
53029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53031 name "Documentation"
53032 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53042 \begin_inset Newline newline
53046 \begin_inset Flex URL
53049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53051 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53059 \begin_layout Bibliography
53060 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53061 LatexCommand bibitem
53068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53070 name "Documentation"
53071 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53076 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53078 \begin_inset Newline newline
53082 \begin_inset Flex URL
53085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53087 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53095 \begin_layout Bibliography
53096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53097 LatexCommand bibitem
53104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53106 name "Documentation"
53107 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53112 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53118 \begin_inset Index idx
53121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53129 \begin_inset Newline newline
53133 \begin_inset Flex URL
53136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53138 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53146 \begin_layout Bibliography
53147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53148 LatexCommand bibitem
53155 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53157 name "Documentation"
53158 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53163 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53169 \begin_inset Index idx
53172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53174 packages ! enumitem
53180 \begin_inset Newline newline
53184 \begin_inset Flex URL
53187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53189 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53197 \begin_layout Bibliography
53198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53199 LatexCommand bibitem
53206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53208 name "Documentation"
53209 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53214 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53220 \begin_inset Index idx
53223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53225 packages ! fancyhdr
53231 \begin_inset Newline newline
53235 \begin_inset Flex URL
53238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53240 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53248 \begin_layout Bibliography
53249 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53250 LatexCommand bibitem
53257 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53259 name "Documentation"
53260 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53265 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53271 \begin_inset Index idx
53274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53276 packages ! hyperref
53282 \begin_inset Newline newline
53286 \begin_inset Flex URL
53289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53291 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53299 \begin_layout Bibliography
53300 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53301 LatexCommand bibitem
53308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53310 name "Documentation"
53311 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53316 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53322 \begin_inset Index idx
53325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53327 packages ! microtype
53333 \begin_inset Newline newline
53337 \begin_inset Flex URL
53340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53342 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53350 \begin_layout Bibliography
53351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53352 LatexCommand bibitem
53359 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53361 name "Documentation"
53362 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53367 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53373 \begin_inset Index idx
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53384 \begin_inset Newline newline
53388 \begin_inset Flex URL
53391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53393 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53401 \begin_layout Bibliography
53402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53403 LatexCommand bibitem
53410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53412 name "Documentation"
53413 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53418 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53424 \begin_inset Index idx
53427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53429 packages ! prettyref
53435 \begin_inset Newline newline
53439 \begin_inset Flex URL
53442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53444 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53452 \begin_layout Bibliography
53453 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53454 LatexCommand bibitem
53461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53463 name "Documentation"
53464 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53469 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53475 \begin_inset Index idx
53478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53480 packages ! refstyle
53486 \begin_inset Newline newline
53490 \begin_inset Flex URL
53493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53495 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53503 \begin_layout Bibliography
53504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53505 LatexCommand bibitem
53512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53515 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53520 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53522 \begin_inset Newline newline
53526 \begin_inset Flex URL
53529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53531 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53539 \begin_layout Bibliography
53540 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53541 LatexCommand bibitem
53548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53551 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53556 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53558 \begin_inset Newline newline
53562 \begin_inset Flex URL
53565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53567 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53575 \begin_layout Bibliography
53576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53577 LatexCommand bibitem
53584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53587 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53592 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53593 for Cyrillic languages:
53594 \begin_inset Newline newline
53598 \begin_inset Flex URL
53601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53603 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53611 \begin_layout Bibliography
53612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53613 LatexCommand bibitem
53620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53623 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53628 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53630 \begin_inset Newline newline
53634 \begin_inset Flex URL
53637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53639 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53647 \begin_layout Bibliography
53648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53649 LatexCommand bibitem
53656 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53659 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53664 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53666 \begin_inset Newline newline
53670 \begin_inset Flex URL
53673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53675 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53683 \begin_layout Bibliography
53684 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53685 LatexCommand bibitem
53692 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53695 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53700 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53702 \begin_inset Newline newline
53706 \begin_inset Flex URL
53709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53711 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53719 \begin_layout Standard
53720 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53754 \begin_inset Note Note
53757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53764 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53765 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53766 bibliography is the second one:
53774 \begin_layout Standard
53775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53776 LatexCommand bibtex
53777 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53778 options "biblio/alphadin"
53785 \begin_layout Standard
53786 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53790 \begin_layout Standard
53794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53800 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53809 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53817 \begin_inset Note Note
53820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53821 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53822 \begin_inset space ~
53826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53828 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53840 \begin_layout Standard
53841 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53842 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53848 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53849 LatexCommand printindex